TW202003739A - Supporting sheet and method of manufacturing the same, and composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing the same - Google Patents

Supporting sheet and method of manufacturing the same, and composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing the same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW202003739A
TW202003739A TW108109998A TW108109998A TW202003739A TW 202003739 A TW202003739 A TW 202003739A TW 108109998 A TW108109998 A TW 108109998A TW 108109998 A TW108109998 A TW 108109998A TW 202003739 A TW202003739 A TW 202003739A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
protective film
film
forming
adhesive layer
meth
Prior art date
Application number
TW108109998A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
佐伯尚哉
古野健太
Original Assignee
日商琳得科股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商琳得科股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商琳得科股份有限公司
Publication of TW202003739A publication Critical patent/TW202003739A/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J133/04Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/22Plastics; Metallised plastics
    • C09J7/25Plastics; Metallised plastics based on macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/255Polyesters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/40Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by release liners
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/02Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/04Manufacture or treatment of semiconductor devices or of parts thereof the devices having potential barriers, e.g. a PN junction, depletion layer or carrier concentration layer
    • H01L21/50Assembly of semiconductor devices using processes or apparatus not provided for in a single one of the subgroups H01L21/06 - H01L21/326, e.g. sealing of a cap to a base of a container
    • H01L21/56Encapsulations, e.g. encapsulation layers, coatings
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L23/00Details of semiconductor or other solid state devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K71/00Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2203/00Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2203/326Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils for bonding electronic components such as wafers, chips or semiconductors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/20Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the structural features of the adhesive itself
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/312Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier parameters being the characterizing feature

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Dicing (AREA)

Abstract

A supporting sheet of the present invention includes a substrate and an adhesive layer on the substrate, wherein the surface of the adhesive layer side of the substrate is an uneven surface. When test pieces are cut from five locations on the supporting sheet and the cross-sections of the adhesive layers of the five test pieces are observed, the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the substrate and the adhesive layer is 0.5 μm or less. A composite sheet for forming prtective film is equipped with a film for forming protective film on the adhesive layer of the supporting sheet.

Description

支撐片及其製造方法以及保護膜形成用複合片及其製造方法Support sheet and manufacturing method thereof, composite sheet for forming protective film and manufacturing method thereof

本發明係關於支撐片及其製造方法以及保護膜形成用複合片及其製造方法。The present invention relates to a support sheet and a method for manufacturing the same, and a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a method for manufacturing the same.

近年,採用通稱「倒置(face down)方式」安裝法進行半導體裝置製造。倒置方式係使用電路面上設有凸塊等電極的半導體晶片,由上述電極接合於基板。因而,半導體晶片雙面中設有電路面之一面的對向面便呈裸露狀態。In recent years, semiconductor devices have been manufactured using the so-called "face down" mounting method. The inverted method uses a semiconductor wafer provided with electrodes such as bumps on the circuit surface, and the electrodes are bonded to the substrate by the electrodes. Therefore, the opposite surface of one side of the semiconductor wafer on which the circuit surface is provided is exposed.

在該呈裸露的半導體晶片背面上形成當作保護膜用之含有機材料的樹脂膜,再依具保護膜之半導體晶片形式組裝於半導體裝置中。保護膜係為在切割步驟、封裝之後,能防止半導體晶片發生龜裂而使用。An organic material-containing resin film used as a protective film is formed on the back surface of the exposed semiconductor wafer, and then assembled into a semiconductor device in the form of a semiconductor wafer with a protective film. The protective film is used to prevent cracks in the semiconductor wafer after the dicing step and packaging.

此種保護膜係例如藉由使具硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜進行硬化而形成。又,經調節物性的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可直接利用為保護膜。所以,保護膜形成用薄膜係使用於貼附在半導體晶圓的背面。保護膜形成用薄膜亦有在例如與半導體晶圓加工時所使用支撐片呈一體化的保護膜形成用複合片狀態下,貼附於半導體晶圓背面上,亦有在未與支撐片呈一體化狀態下貼附於半導體晶圓背面上。Such a protective film is formed by, for example, curing a thin film for forming a curable protective film. In addition, the film for forming a non-curable protective film whose physical properties are adjusted can also be directly used as a protective film. Therefore, the thin film for forming a protective film is used for attaching to the back surface of a semiconductor wafer. For example, the protective film forming film may be attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer in the state of a protective film forming composite sheet integrated with the support sheet used for processing the semiconductor wafer, or may not be integrated with the support sheet It is attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer in the chemical state.

保護膜形成用複合片係利用其中的保護膜形成用薄膜貼附於半導體晶片背面後,再依各自的合適時序施行例如:利用保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化形成保護膜、保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜之切斷、半導體晶圓分割(切割)為半導體晶片、以及從支撐片上拾取背面具有經切斷後保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜的半導體晶片(具保護膜形成用薄膜之半導體晶片或具保護膜之半導體晶片)等。而,在拾取具保護膜形成用薄膜之半導體晶片時,藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化而成為具保護膜之半導體晶片,最終使用具保護膜之半導體晶片製造半導體裝置。依此,保護膜形成用複合片中的支撐片可利用為切割片。另外,當保護膜形成用薄膜係非硬化性的情況,在該等各項步驟中,保護膜形成用薄膜直接被使用為保護膜。After the protective film forming composite sheet is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer by using the protective film forming film, it can be implemented according to the respective appropriate timing. For example, the protective film is formed by hardening the protective film forming film, the protective film forming film or The cutting of the protective film, the singulation (dicing) of the semiconductor wafer into a semiconductor wafer, and the picking up of the semiconductor wafer with the protective film forming film or protective film on the back side (the semiconductor wafer or film with protective film forming film) Semiconductor film of protective film) etc. On the other hand, when picking up a semiconductor wafer with a thin film for forming a protective film, the semiconductor film with a protective film is formed by hardening the thin film for forming a protective film, and finally a semiconductor device is manufactured using the semiconductor wafer with a protective film. Accordingly, the support sheet in the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be used as a dicing sheet. In addition, when the thin film for forming a protective film is non-curable, the thin film for forming a protective film is directly used as a protective film in these steps.

另一方面,保護膜形成用薄膜在未與支撐片呈一體化狀態下,貼附於半導體晶圓背面之後,在該保護膜形成用薄膜雙面中,於臨半導體晶圓貼附面之對向的露出面上貼附著支撐片。其餘以後均依照與上述使用保護膜形成用複合片的情況為相同方法,獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片或具保護膜形成用薄膜之半導體晶片,並製造半導體裝置。此情況,保護膜形成用薄膜係依未與支撐片呈一體化狀態下,貼附於半導體晶圓背面,但藉由與貼附後的支撐片呈一體化,而構成保護膜形成用複合片。On the other hand, after the film for protective film formation is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer without being integrated with the support sheet, the double side of the film for protective film formation is opposite the surface to which the semiconductor wafer is attached Attach the support sheet to the exposed surface. For the rest, the semiconductor wafer with a protective film or the semiconductor wafer with a thin film for forming a protective film is obtained according to the same method as in the case where the composite film for forming a protective film is used, and a semiconductor device is manufactured. In this case, the film for forming a protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer in a state where it is not integrated with the support sheet, but by integrating with the support sheet after attachment, a composite sheet for forming a protective film is formed .

針對此種保護膜形成用複合片,例如有揭示切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜,係具備有:切割膠帶(支撐片)與半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)的切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用複合片),而該切割膠帶(支撐片)係具有:具凹凸加工面之基材、與積層於該基材之上述凹凸加工面上的黏著劑層;該半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)係積層於該切割膠帶的黏著劑層上;其中,上述切割膠帶的霧度係45%以下(參照專利文獻1)。For such a composite film for forming a protective film, for example, there is disclosed a dicing tape integrated type semiconductor backside protective film, which is a dicing tape including a dicing tape (support sheet) and a semiconductor backside protective film (protective film forming film) A thin film for protecting the back surface of a bulk semiconductor (a composite sheet for forming a protective film), and the dicing tape (support sheet) has a base material having a rough surface and an adhesive layer stacked on the rough surface of the base material The film for semiconductor back surface protection (film for forming a protective film) is laminated on the adhesive layer of the dicing tape; wherein the haze of the dicing tape is 45% or less (refer to Patent Document 1).

但是,專利文獻1所揭示的保護膜形成用複合片(切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜),因為係在基材的凹凸加工面上積層黏著劑層,因而會有黏著劑無法充分追蹤基材的凹凸,導致在基材與黏著劑間會有發生該等未貼合的區域(非貼合區域)。又,對保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的黏著劑層之一面,會有利用雷射照射而施行列印的情形,但依照黏著劑層的凹凸形狀,會有導致隔著基材與黏著劑層的刻印檢視性降低之情況。 [先行技術文獻] [專利文獻]However, the composite sheet for forming a protective film (a dicing tape-integrated semiconductor backside protection film) disclosed in Patent Document 1 has an adhesive layer stacked on the uneven surface of the substrate, so there is an adhesive that cannot fully track the substrate. The unevenness of the material leads to the unbonded areas (non-bonded areas) between the substrate and the adhesive. In addition, printing may be performed on one surface of the adhesive layer of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film by laser irradiation, but depending on the uneven shape of the adhesive layer, it may cause the substrate and the adhesive to separate The visibility of the layer marking is reduced. [Advanced technical literature] [Patent Literature]

[專利文獻1] 日本專利第5432853號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent No. 5432853

(發明所欲解決之課題)(Problems to be solved by the invention)

本發明目的在於提供支撐片以及包括上述支撐片的保護膜形成用複合片,在基材凹凸面設有黏著劑層構成的支撐片,在其黏著劑層上設有保護膜形成用薄膜的保護膜形成用複合片中,可實現基材與黏著劑間之良好密接性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的良好刻印檢視性。 (解決課題之技術手段)An object of the present invention is to provide a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film including the above support sheet, a support sheet composed of an adhesive layer on an uneven surface of a base material, and a protection film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer In the composite sheet for film formation, good adhesion between the base material and the adhesive, and good marking visibility of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film can be achieved. (Technical means to solve the problem)

本發明係包括有以下態樣。 [1] 一種支撐片,係包括基材,且在上述基材上設有黏著劑層的支撐片,其中,上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係呈凹凸面,從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對這5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,上述基材與上述黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)係0.5μm以下。 [2] 如上述[1]所記載的支撐片,其中,上述黏著劑層係直接接觸於上述基材的凹凸面。 [3] 如上述[1]或[2]所記載的支撐片,其中,從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對該等5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,上述基材與上述黏著劑層未貼合區域的個數,係針對上述試驗片於上述試驗片截面寬度方向中心部1mm區域進行觀察時,各試驗片的個數合計分別在5個以下。 [4] 一種支撐片之製造方法,係上述[1]~[3]中任一項所記載支撐片的製造方法,包括下列步驟: 準備依序包括基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜,且上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面呈凹凸面的第1積層片;以及 將上述第1積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時。The present invention includes the following aspects. [1] A support sheet comprising a base material, and a support sheet provided with an adhesive layer on the base material, wherein the base material has a concave-convex surface on one surface of the adhesive layer, from the support sheet 5 When the test pieces were cut out from each place and the cross-section of the adhesive layer was observed with respect to these five test pieces, the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the base material and the adhesive layer was 0.5 μm or less. [2] The support sheet according to [1] above, wherein the adhesive layer directly contacts the uneven surface of the base material. [3] The support sheet according to the above [1] or [2], wherein the test piece is cut out from 5 places of the support sheet, and the cross section of the adhesive layer is observed with respect to these 5 test pieces, the base material The number of unattached areas to the adhesive layer was observed when the test piece was observed in a 1 mm area at the center of the cross-sectional width direction of the test piece, and the total number of each test piece was 5 or less. [4] A method for manufacturing a support sheet is the method for manufacturing a support sheet described in any one of the above [1] to [3], including the following steps: Preparing a first laminated sheet including a substrate, an adhesive layer, and a first release film in sequence, and the substrate has a concave-convex surface on one surface of the adhesive layer; and The first laminated sheet is stored at 53 to 75°C for 24 to 720 hours.

[5] 一種保護膜形成用複合片,係在上述[1]~[3]中任一項所記載支撐片中的黏著劑層上,設置保護膜形成用薄膜。 [6] 一種保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,係上述[5]所記載保護膜形成用複合片的製造方法,包括下列步驟: 準備第1積層片與積層薄膜,此積層薄膜依序包括第3剝離薄膜、保護膜形成用薄膜及第2剝離薄膜此第1積層片依序包括基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜,且上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係凹凸面; 將上述第1積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時; 除去上述第1剝離薄膜與第2剝離薄膜,使上述黏著劑層的露出面與上述保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面相貼合,而製造依序包括上述基材、上述黏著劑層、上述保護膜形成用薄膜及上述第3剝離薄膜的第2積層片;以及 將上述第2積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時。 [7] 如上述[6]所記載的保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,其中,使上述黏著劑層的露出面、與上述保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面相貼合之步驟,係在53~75℃中,以0.3~0.8MPa壓力施行按壓狀態下實行。 [8] 如上述[6]或[7]所記載的製造方法,其中,上述第1積層片、上述積層薄膜及上述第2積層片分別均係長條的積層片或積層薄膜;上述第1積層片及上述第2積層片分別在上述保存的步驟中被捲取呈捲筒狀保存。 [發明效果][5] A composite sheet for forming a protective film, which is provided with a thin film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the support sheet described in any one of the above [1] to [3]. [6] A method for manufacturing a composite sheet for forming a protective film is the method for manufacturing a composite sheet for forming a protective film as described in [5] above, which includes the following steps: Prepare a first laminate sheet and a laminate film, the laminate film includes a third release film, a protective film forming film, and a second release film. The first laminate sheet includes a substrate, an adhesive layer, and a first release film in sequence, And the base material is a concave-convex surface by one surface of the adhesive layer; Store the first laminated sheet at 53~75℃ for 24~720 hours; The first peeling film and the second peeling film are removed, and the exposed surface of the adhesive layer is bonded to the exposed surface of the protective film forming film, and the manufacturing sequence includes the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the protective film Forming film and the second lamination sheet of the above-mentioned third release film; and The above second laminated sheet is stored at 53 to 75°C for 24 to 720 hours. [7] The method for manufacturing a composite sheet for forming a protective film as described in [6] above, wherein the step of bonding the exposed surface of the adhesive layer to the exposed surface of the protective film forming film is 53 At ~75°C, press with 0.3~0.8MPa pressure. [8] The manufacturing method according to the above [6] or [7], wherein the first laminate sheet, the laminate film and the second laminate sheet are each a long laminate sheet or a laminate film; the first laminate The sheet and the second laminated sheet are respectively wound and stored in a roll shape in the storing step. [Effect of the invention]

藉由使用本發明的支撐片構成保護膜形成用複合片,便可實現基材與黏著劑間之良好密接性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的良好刻印檢視性。By forming the composite sheet for forming a protective film using the support sheet of the present invention, good adhesion between the base material and the adhesive, and good marking visibility of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film across the support sheet can be achieved.

◇支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片 本發明一實施形態的支撐片,係包括基材且在上述基材上設有黏著劑層的支撐片;其中,上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係凹凸面;從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對這5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,上述基材與上述黏著劑層間的層間距離最大值(本說明書中亦稱「d1」)係在0.5μm以下。◇Composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film A support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention is a support sheet including a base material and an adhesive layer provided on the base material; wherein the base material has a concave-convex surface on one surface of the adhesive layer; from the support sheet 5 When the test pieces were cut out from each place and the cross-section of the adhesive layer was observed for these five test pieces, the maximum interlayer distance (also referred to as "d1" in this specification) between the substrate and the adhesive layer was 0.5 μm or less.

藉由基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)在0.5μm以下,便可實現基材與黏著劑間之良好密接性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的良好刻印檢視性。By the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the substrate and the adhesive layer being 0.5 μm or less, good adhesion between the substrate and the adhesive, and a good protective film or film for forming a protective film across the support sheet can be achieved Imprint visibility.

本發明一實施形態的支撐片,係包括基材且在上述基材上設有黏著劑層的支撐片;其中,上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係凹凸面;從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對這5片試驗片,分別求取黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值時,較佳係上述最小值的平均值(本說明書中亦稱「S值」)達1.5μm以上,且上述最大值的平均值(本說明書亦稱「L值」)在9μm以下。 再者,從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對這5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,較佳係上述基材與上述黏著劑層間未貼合區域的數量在5個以下。 再者,本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片,係在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上設有保護膜形成用薄膜。A support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention is a support sheet including a base material and an adhesive layer provided on the base material; wherein the base material has a concave-convex surface on one surface of the adhesive layer; from the support sheet 5 Cut the test piece at each place, and for these 5 test pieces, when the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer are obtained, it is better to be the average of the above minimum value (also referred to as "S value" in this manual). 1.5 μm or more, and the average value of the above-mentioned maximum value (also referred to as “L value” in this specification) is 9 μm or less. Furthermore, when the test piece is cut out from 5 places of the above-mentioned support sheet, and the cross-section of the adhesive layer is observed for these 5 test pieces, it is preferable that the number of unbonded areas between the base material and the adhesive layer is 5 or less . Furthermore, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention, a film for forming a protective film is provided on the adhesive layer in the support sheet.

再者,藉由上述黏著劑層的S值達1.5μm以上,黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性便容易呈良好。本說明書中所謂「積層性」,在無特別聲明前提下,係指對象2層的積層狀態正常度。所謂「積層性良好」係指例如對象相鄰2層間,完全沒有未貼合的區域(空隙部),或未貼合區域的數量少且未貼合區域的層間距離小。 另一方面,藉由上述黏著劑層的L值在9μm以下,保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性便容易呈良好。Furthermore, when the S value of the adhesive layer is 1.5 μm or more, the lamination property between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film tends to be good. The term "stackability" in this manual refers to the normality of the stacking state of the target 2 layers unless otherwise stated. The “good stackability” means, for example, that there are no unbonded areas (voids) between two adjacent layers of the object, or that the number of unbonded areas is small and the interlayer distance of the unbonded areas is small. On the other hand, when the L value of the adhesive layer is 9 μm or less, the visibility of the engraving of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film via the support sheet is likely to be good.

上述試驗片係從支撐片的5個地方切取,將支撐片在其厚度方向整個切斷而獲得。試驗片係包括構成支撐片所有層的小片。The above test piece was obtained by cutting out the support piece at five places, and cutting the support piece in its entire thickness direction. The test piece system includes small pieces constituting all layers of the support piece.

試驗片的大小並無特別的限定,較佳係構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面1邊長度達2mm以上。藉由使用此種大小的試驗片,便可以更高精度求得黏著劑層的S值與L值。 上述1邊長度的最大值並無特別的限定。例如就從試驗片製作更容易的觀點,上述1邊的長度較佳係在10mm以下。The size of the test piece is not particularly limited, and it is preferable that the length of one side of the accumulated surface or exposed surface constituting each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) of the test piece be 2 mm or more. By using test pieces of this size, the S value and L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher accuracy. The maximum value of the length of one side is not particularly limited. For example, from the viewpoint of making the test piece easier, the length of the one side is preferably 10 mm or less.

試驗片的平面形狀─即,構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面之形狀,較佳係多邊形狀,就從試驗片切取更容易的觀點,更佳係四邊形狀。The plane shape of the test piece-that is, the shape of the accumulated surface or exposed surface constituting each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) of the test piece, preferably a polygonal shape, from the viewpoint of easier cutting from the test piece, more preferably a quadrilateral shape.

試驗片較佳係可舉例如構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面大小呈3mm×3mm的四邊形狀。但,此僅為較佳試驗片一例而已。The test piece preferably includes, for example, a quadrilateral shape having a size of 3 mm×3 mm in which the accumulated surface or exposed surface of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece is formed. However, this is just one example of a better test piece.

支撐片在試驗片的5個地方切取位置並無特別的限定,為能更高精度求取黏著劑層的S值與L值,可經考慮後述保護膜形成用薄膜的積層預定位置才再行選擇。 例如支撐片在1片保護膜形成用薄膜的積層預定位置中,選擇屬於配置預定的保護膜形成用薄膜中心(重心)部之1個地方,以及靠近保護膜形成用薄膜周緣部位處、且相對於此中心(重心)部幾乎成點對稱位置配置預定的4個地方等5個地方。The cutting position of the support sheet at 5 places of the test piece is not particularly limited. In order to obtain the S value and L value of the adhesive layer with higher accuracy, the predetermined position of the lamination of the protective film forming film described later can be considered. select. For example, at a predetermined position for laminating a thin film for forming a protective film, the supporting sheet is selected to be a place that belongs to the center (center of gravity) of the thin film for forming a protective film and that is close to the periphery of the thin film for forming a protective film In this center (center of gravity) part, 5 places such as 4 predetermined places are arranged almost in point symmetry.

支撐片中,試驗片切取位置的中心(重心)間距離較佳係50~200mm。藉由依此設定,便可以更高精度求得黏著劑層的S值與L值。In the support piece, the distance between the centers (gravity centers) of the test piece cutting positions is preferably 50 to 200 mm. With this setting, the S value and L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher accuracy.

為能從試驗片求得黏著劑層的S值與L值,便針對試驗片重新形成截面,再針對此形成的截面,便可在各個試驗片逐一測定黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值。 重新形成的截面係針對1片試驗片可僅有1面、亦可達2面以上,但通常僅1面便足夠。 然後,從這些至少5個最小值與最大值便可計算出S值與L值。In order to obtain the S value and L value of the adhesive layer from the test piece, the cross section is formed again for the test piece, and then for the formed cross section, the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured on each test piece one by one . The reconstructed cross-section may have only one side or more than two sides for one test piece, but usually only one side is sufficient. Then, from these at least 5 minimum and maximum values, the S and L values can be calculated.

試驗片係可依照公知方法形成截面。例如藉由使用公知截面試料製作裝置(截面拋光機),便可以抑制變動、高重現性,在試驗片中形成截面。The test piece system can form a cross section according to a known method. For example, by using a well-known cross-section sample production device (cross-section polishing machine), it is possible to suppress variations and achieve high reproducibility, and to form a cross-section in a test piece.

黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值係例如使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察試驗片的上述截面便可測定。The minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer can be determined by observing the above-mentioned cross section of the test piece, for example, using a scanning electron microscope (SEM).

各試驗片的上述截面中,測定基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)的區域,以在構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)積層方向的正交方向(大致相對於各層積層面或露出面的平行方向)的50~1500μm的區域為佳。藉由依此設定,便可以高效率且高精度測定基材與黏著劑層間之的層間距離的最大值(d1)。黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值測定亦同。In the above-mentioned cross section of each test piece, the area of the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the base material and the adhesive layer is measured so as to be orthogonal to the direction in which the layers constituting the test piece (base material, adhesive layer, etc.) are stacked (roughly opposite It is preferably in the region of 50 to 1500 μm in each layered layer or parallel direction of the exposed surface). With this setting, the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the substrate and the adhesive layer can be measured with high efficiency and high accuracy. The determination of the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer is the same.

針對尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片、與已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之間,若比較黏著劑層的厚度最小值時,其最小值係相互相同、或已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之上述最小值為略小,在這麼小的情況,其差值屬於可忽視的程度。 關於黏著劑層的厚度最大值亦同。即,在尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片、與已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之間,若比較黏著劑層的厚度最大值時,其最大值係相互相同、或已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之上述最大值為略小,在這麼小的情況,其差值屬於可忽視的程度。 所以,不使用支撐片而使用從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,依照與使用從支撐片所切取試驗片情況的相同方法亦可求取層間距離的最大值(d1),亦可求取黏著劑層的S值與L值。依此使用從保護膜形成用複合片所切取的試驗片時,若層間距離最大值(d1)在0.5μm以下,則此保護膜形成用複合片便反映出上述本發明的效果。When the minimum thickness of the adhesive layer is compared between the support sheet that has not yet formed the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the support sheet that has already formed the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the minimum values are the same as each other or have been constructed The minimum value of the support sheet of the composite sheet for forming a protective film is slightly smaller. In such a small case, the difference is negligible. The same applies to the maximum thickness of the adhesive layer. That is, when the maximum thickness of the adhesive layer is compared between the support sheet that has not yet constituted the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the support sheet that has already constituted the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the maximum values are the same as each other, or The above-mentioned maximum value of the support sheet that has constituted the composite sheet for forming a protective film is slightly smaller. In such a small case, the difference is negligible. Therefore, instead of using a support sheet, a test piece cut from a composite sheet for forming a protective film can be used, and the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance can also be obtained according to the same method as when the test piece cut out from the support sheet is used. Take the S and L values of the adhesive layer. When the test piece cut out from the composite film for protective film formation is used in this way, if the maximum interlayer distance (d1) is 0.5 μm or less, the composite film for protective film formation reflects the effects of the present invention described above.

即,本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片,係在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上設有保護膜形成用薄膜的保護膜形成用複合片;其中,從上述保護膜形成用複合片的5個地方切取試驗片,再針對這5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)係在0.5μm以下。That is, the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is a composite sheet for forming a protective film in which a thin film for forming a protective film is provided on the adhesive layer in the support sheet; The test piece was cut out at 5 places of the piece, and the cross-section of the adhesive layer was observed for these 5 test pieces, and the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the base material and the adhesive layer was 0.5 μm or less.

同樣,亦可不使用尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片而是使用從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,依照與使用從支撐片所切取試驗片時的相同方法,求取黏著劑層的S值與L值。依此當使用從保護膜形成用複合片所切取的試驗片時,若黏著劑層的S值達1.5μm以上、且黏著劑層的L值在9μm以下,則此保護膜形成用複合片輕易反映出上述本發明的效果。Similarly, instead of using a support sheet that has not yet constituted a composite sheet for forming a protective film, a test piece cut out from the composite sheet for forming a protective film may be used. In the same way as when the test piece cut out from the support sheet is used, adhesion S value and L value of the agent layer. Accordingly, when using a test piece cut out from the composite film for forming a protective film, if the S value of the adhesive layer is 1.5 μm or more and the L value of the adhesive layer is 9 μm or less, the composite film for forming a protective film is easy The above-mentioned effects of the present invention are reflected.

即,本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片,較佳係在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上,設有保護膜形成用薄膜的保護膜形成用複合片;其中,從上述保護膜形成用複合片的5個地方切取試驗片,且針對這5片試驗片分別求取黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值時,上述最小值的平均值(S值)達1.5μm以上,且上述最大值的平均值(L值)在9μm以下。That is, the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is preferably a composite sheet for forming a protective film provided with a thin film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the support sheet; When the test piece was cut at 5 places of the composite sheet for forming, and the minimum and maximum values of the thickness of the adhesive layer were obtained for these 5 test pieces, the average value (S value) of the above minimum value reached 1.5 μm or more, and The average value (L value) of the maximum value is 9 μm or less.

另外,從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,係將保護膜形成用複合片在厚度方向整個切斷而獲得,為包括構成保護膜形成用複合片之所有層的小片。In addition, the test piece cut out from the composite film for protective film formation was obtained by cutting the entire composite film for protective film formation in the thickness direction, and was a small piece including all layers constituting the composite film for protective film formation.

以下,參照圖式,針對本發明保護膜形成用複合片的全體構成進行說明。另外,以下說明所使用的圖,為能容易瞭解本發明特徵,為了方便有將重要部位予以部分放大圖示的情況,各構成要件的尺寸比率等不一定同實際尺寸。Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, the drawings used in the following description are for the sake of easy understanding of the characteristics of the present invention, and for the sake of convenience, the important parts are partially enlarged and illustrated, and the dimensional ratios of the components and the like are not necessarily the same as the actual sizes.

圖1所示係本發明一實施形態的支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之示意剖視圖。 此處所示保護膜形成用複合片1A係包括基材11,在基材11上設有黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12上設有保護膜形成用薄膜13。支撐片10係基材11與黏著劑層12的積層體,保護膜形成用複合片1A,換言之係具有在支撐片10其中一面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)10a上,積層保護膜形成用薄膜13的構成。又,保護膜形成用複合片1A係更進一步在保護膜形成用薄膜13上設有剝離薄膜15。FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a support sheet and a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown here includes a base material 11, an adhesive layer 12 is provided on the base material 11, and a thin film 13 for forming a protective film is provided on the adhesive layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, and the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, in other words, is provided on one side of the support sheet 10 (also referred to as "the first side" in this specification) 10a for protection The structure of the thin film 13 for film formation. In addition, the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film further includes a release film 15 on the film 13 for forming a protective film.

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,在基材11其中一面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)11a積層黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12中與基材11側為相反側之面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)12a的全面,積層保護膜形成用薄膜13,在保護膜形成用薄膜13中與黏著劑層12側為相反側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)13a其中一部分(即周緣部附近的區域),積層夾具用接著劑層16,在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a中未積層著夾具用接著劑層16之一面、與夾具用接著劑層16未接觸到保護膜形成用薄膜13之一面16a(上面與側面),積層剝離薄膜15。 另外,圖1中,元件符號13b係表示保護膜形成用薄膜13臨黏著劑層12之一面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, an adhesive layer 12 is laminated on one side of the base material 11 (also referred to as "first surface" in this specification) 11a, and the surface of the adhesive layer 12 opposite to the base material 11 side (Also referred to as the "first surface" in this specification) The entire surface of 12a is laminated with a thin film 13 for forming a protective film, in the thin film 13 for forming a protective film, the surface opposite to the adhesive layer 12 side (also referred to as "in this specification" The first surface") part of 13a (that is, the area near the peripheral edge), the adhesive layer 16 for the jig is laminated, and one surface of the adhesive layer 16 for the jig is not laminated on the first surface 13a of the protective film forming film 13; Without contacting the adhesive layer 16 for the jig with one surface 16a (upper surface and side surface) of the protective film forming film 13, the peeling film 15 is laminated. In addition, in FIG. 1, the element symbol 13b represents a surface of the protective film forming film 13 that faces the adhesive layer 12 (also referred to as "second surface" in this specification).

夾具用接著劑層16亦可例如含有接著劑成分的單層構造,亦可在成為芯材的片材雙面上積層著含接著劑成分之層而構成複數層構造。The adhesive layer 16 for a jig may have, for example, a single-layer structure containing an adhesive component, or a layer containing an adhesive component may be laminated on both sides of a sheet material to be a core material to form a multiple-layer structure.

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,基材11的第1面11a係凹凸面。 再者,黏著劑層12係直接接觸到基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a狀態而設置。所以,黏著劑層12臨基材11之一面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)12b係凹凸面。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in direct contact with the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. Therefore, the adhesive layer 12 faces the surface 11 of the substrate 11 (also referred to as "second surface" in this specification) 12b as an uneven surface.

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,基材11中與黏著劑層12側為相反側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)11b係可為凹凸面或平滑面(非凹凸面、亮澤面)中之任一者,但以平滑面為佳。基材11的第2面11b亦可謂為支撐片10中與保護膜形成用薄膜13側為相反側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)10b。 關於「凹凸面」、「平滑面」,容後詳述。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the surface of the substrate 11 opposite to the adhesive layer 12 side (also referred to as "second surface" in this specification) 11b may be an uneven surface or a smooth surface (non-concave surface, Glossy surface), but smooth surface is preferred. The second surface 11b of the base material 11 can also be referred to as a surface (also referred to as a "second surface" in this specification) 10b of the support sheet 10 on the side opposite to the protective film forming film 13 side. The "concave-convex surface" and "smooth surface" will be described in detail later.

圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A係在已去除剝離薄膜15的狀態下,在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a貼附半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面,更在夾具用接著劑層16的面16a中,於上面貼附著環形框架等夾具而使用。The composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 is in a state where the peeling film 15 has been removed, and the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the first surface 13a of the film 13 for forming a protective film. On the surface 16a of the adhesive layer 16, a jig such as a ring frame is attached to the upper surface and used.

圖2係一起顯示本發明另一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片之示意剖視圖。 另外,在圖2以後的圖中,針對已說明過的圖式所示相同構成要件,賦予與該說明過圖式相同的元件符號,並省略詳細說明。2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to another embodiment of the present invention. In addition, in the subsequent drawings of FIG. 2, the same constituent elements as those shown in the previously described drawings are given the same reference numerals as those in the previously described drawings, and detailed descriptions are omitted.

此處所示保護膜形成用複合片1B係除了未設置夾具用接著劑層16之外,其餘均與圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A相同。即,保護膜形成用複合片1B中,在基材11的第1面11a積層黏著劑層12,並在黏著劑層12的第1面12a全面積層保護膜形成用薄膜13,更於保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a全面積層剝離薄膜15。The composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 except that the adhesive layer 16 for a jig is not provided. That is, in the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11 a of the base material 11, and the protective film forming film 13 is deposited on the entire surface of the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 over the protective film. The film 15 of the first surface 13a of the forming film 13 is peeled off over the entire area.

保護膜形成用複合片1B中,亦是基材11的第1面11a屬於凹凸面。 再者,黏著劑層12係呈直接接觸到基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a狀態而設置。所以,黏著劑層12臨基材11之一面(第2面)12b係凹凸面。 保護膜形成用複合片1B中,亦是基材11的第2面11b(換言之,支撐片10的第2面10b)可為凹凸面或平滑面(非凹凸面)中之任一者,但以平滑面為佳。In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 also belongs to the uneven surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in direct contact with the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. Therefore, one surface (second surface) 12b of the adhesive layer 12 facing the substrate 11 is an uneven surface. In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the base material 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) may be either a concave-convex surface or a smooth surface (non-concavo-convex surface), but A smooth surface is better.

圖2所示保護膜形成用複合片1B係在已去除剝離薄膜15的狀態下,於保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a中,在中央側其中一部分區域處貼附半導體晶圓(未圖示),更在周緣附近區域處貼附著環形框架等夾具而使用。The composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 2 is in a state where the peeling film 15 has been removed, and a semiconductor wafer is attached to a part of the central side of the first surface 13a of the film 13 for forming a protective film (not (Illustrated), it is used by attaching a jig such as a ring frame to the area near the periphery.

圖3所示係本發明再另一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片之示意剖視圖。 此處所示保護膜形成用複合片1C係除了保護膜形成用薄膜的形狀不同之外,其餘均與圖2所示保護膜形成用複合片1B相同。即,保護膜形成用複合片1C係包括基材11,在基材11上包括黏著劑層12,更在黏著劑層12上設有保護膜形成用薄膜23。支撐片10係基材11與黏著劑層12的積層體,保護膜形成用複合片1C,換言之係具有在支撐片10的第1面(臨保護膜形成用薄膜23之一面)10a上,積層著保護膜形成用薄膜23的構成。又,保護膜形成用複合片1C係更進一步在保護膜形成用薄膜23上包括剝離薄膜15。3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to still another embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1C for protective film formation shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1B for protective film formation shown in FIG. 2 except that the shape of the thin film for protective film formation is different. That is, the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film includes a base material 11, an adhesive layer 12 is provided on the base material 11, and a thin film 23 for forming a protective film is further provided on the adhesive layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, and the protective film forming composite sheet 1C, in other words, is provided on the first surface of the support sheet 10 (on the side of the protective film forming film 23) 10a, and is laminated The configuration of the thin film 23 for forming a protective film. In addition, the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film further includes a peeling film 15 on the film 23 for forming a protective film.

保護膜形成用複合片1C中,在基材11的第1面11a積層著黏著劑層12,並在黏著劑層12的第1面12a其中一部分(即,中央區域)積層著保護膜形成用薄膜23。而且,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a中未積層保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域、與保護膜形成用薄膜23未接觸到黏著劑層12之一面23a(上面與側面)上,積層著剝離薄膜15。 另外,圖3中,元件符號23b係表示保護膜形成用薄膜23臨黏著劑層12之一面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)。In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, an adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11a of the base material 11, and a protective film forming layer is laminated on a part of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 (that is, the central region)膜23。 The film 23. In addition, on the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12, the area where the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated, and the protective film forming film 23 is not in contact with the surface 23 a (upper and side surfaces) of the adhesive layer 12, are laminated The film 15 is peeled off. In addition, in FIG. 3, the element symbol 23b represents a surface of the protective film forming film 23 that faces the adhesive layer 12 (also referred to as "second surface" in this specification).

當從上方朝下俯視保護膜形成用複合片1C時,保護膜形成用薄膜23的表面積較小於黏著劑層12的表面積,且具有例如圓形狀等形狀。When the protective film forming composite sheet 1C is viewed from above, the surface area of the protective film forming film 23 is smaller than the surface area of the adhesive layer 12 and has a shape such as a circular shape.

保護膜形成用複合片1C中,亦是基材11的第1面11a呈凹凸面。 再者,黏著劑層12係呈直接接觸到基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a狀態而設置。所以,黏著劑層12臨基材11之一面(第2面)12b係凹凸面。 保護膜形成用複合片1C中,亦是基材11的第2面11b(換言之,支撐片10的第2面10b)係可為凹凸面或平滑面(非凹凸面)中之任一者,但以平滑面為佳。In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 also has an uneven surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in direct contact with the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. Therefore, one surface (second surface) 12b of the adhesive layer 12 facing the substrate 11 is an uneven surface. In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the base material 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) may be either a concave-convex surface or a smooth surface (non-concavo-convex surface), But smooth surface is better.

圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片1C係在已去除剝離薄膜15狀態下,於保護膜形成用薄膜23之面23a貼附半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面,更在黏著劑層12的第1面12a中未積層保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域處,貼附環形框架等夾具而使用。The composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3 is in a state where the peeling film 15 has been removed, and the back surface of a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to the surface 23a of the film 23 for forming a protective film, and furthermore, the adhesive layer 12 In the area of the first surface 12a where the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated, a jig such as a ring frame is attached and used.

另外,圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片1C,亦可在黏著劑層12的第1面12a中未積層保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域處,同圖1所示積層著夾具用接著劑層(未圖示)。此種具備夾具用接著劑層的保護膜形成用複合片1C,係與圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片同樣,在夾具用接著劑層的上面貼附著環形框架等夾具而使用。In addition, in the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3, the adhesive for jigs as shown in FIG. 1 may be stacked on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 where the protective film forming film 23 is not stacked. Layer (not shown). Such a composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film having an adhesive layer for a jig is used in the same manner as the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 by attaching a jig such as a ring frame on the adhesive layer for a jig.

依此,保護膜形成用複合片係不管支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜採何種形態,均可包括夾具用接著劑層。但,通常如圖1所示,包括夾具用接著劑層的保護膜形成用複合片,以在保護膜形成用薄膜上設有夾具用接著劑層為佳。Accordingly, the composite sheet for forming a protective film can include an adhesive layer for jigs regardless of the form of the support sheet and the film for forming a protective film. However, in general, as shown in FIG. 1, it is preferable that a composite sheet for forming a protective film including an adhesive layer for a jig is provided with an adhesive layer for a jig on a film for forming a protective film.

本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片並不僅侷限於圖1~圖3所示,在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可變更或刪除圖1~圖3所示的其中一部分構成,亦可在截至目前所說明的構成中更進一步追加其他構成等等。The composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, and a part of the parts shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 may be changed or deleted within the scope of not damaging the effects of the present invention. As for the configuration, other configurations may be further added to the configurations described so far.

例如圖1~圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片中,亦可在基材11與黏著劑層12之間設置中間層。即,本發明的保護膜形成用複合片中,支撐片亦可依照基材、中間層及黏著劑層的順序,在其厚度方向上積層構成。中間層係可配合目的任意選擇。 再者,圖1~圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片亦可在任意地方設置上述中間層以外的層。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片中,亦可在剝離薄膜、與此剝離薄膜直接接觸的層之間,局部產生間隙。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片的各層大小、形狀等,係可配合目的任意調整。For example, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, an intermediate layer may be provided between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12. That is, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention, the support sheet may be formed by laminating in the thickness direction in the order of the base material, the intermediate layer, and the adhesive layer. The middle layer system can be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose. In addition, the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 may be provided with a layer other than the intermediate layer at any place. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, a gap may be locally generated between the peeling film and the layer directly in contact with the peeling film. In addition, the size, shape, etc. of each layer of the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be arbitrarily adjusted according to the purpose.

但,如圖1~圖3所示,保護膜形成用複合片中,較好係黏著劑層直接接觸於基材的凹凸面(第1面),換言之,在基材與黏著劑層之間並未設置中間層,而是在基材上直接接觸而積層著黏著劑層。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片中,較好係保護膜形成用薄膜直接接觸於黏著劑層的第1面,換言之,在黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜之間並沒有設置其他層,而是在黏著劑層上直接接觸而積層著保護膜形成用薄膜。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片,更佳係這些條件均能滿足,即依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序,在其厚度方向上相互直接接觸、積層而構成。However, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the adhesive layer directly contacts the uneven surface (first surface) of the substrate, in other words, between the substrate and the adhesive layer No intermediate layer is provided, but an adhesive layer is laminated directly on the substrate. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the film for forming a protective film directly contacts the first surface of the adhesive layer. In other words, no other layer is provided between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film. Instead, a thin film for forming a protective film is directly contacted on the adhesive layer. Furthermore, the composite sheet for forming a protective film preferably satisfies all these conditions, that is, it is constituted by directly contacting and laminating each other in the thickness direction in the order of the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film.

上述支撐片較佳係透明。 支撐片配合目的亦可被著色、亦可蒸鍍有其他層。 例如當保護膜形成用薄膜係能量線硬化性的情況,支撐片以使能量線穿透為佳。The support sheet is preferably transparent. The supporting sheet can also be colored for other purposes, or it can be vapor-deposited with other layers. For example, when the energy ray of the thin film for protective film formation is hardenable, it is preferable that the support sheet penetrate the energy ray.

本說明書中,所謂「能量線」係指電磁波或帶電粒子束中具有能量量子,可舉例如:紫外線、放射線、電子束等。紫外線係可使用例如紫外線源之高壓水銀燈、熔絲燈(fusion lamp)、氙燈、黑光燈(black-light)或LED燈等進行照射。電子束係可照射由電子束加速器等所生成者。 本說明書中,所謂「能量線硬化性」係指藉由能量線的照射而硬化的性質;所謂「非能量線硬化性」係即便照射能量線但仍不會硬化的性質。In this specification, the "energy rays" refer to electromagnetic waves or charged particle beams having energy quanta, and examples include ultraviolet rays, radiation, and electron beams. The ultraviolet system can be irradiated using, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp, a fusion lamp, a xenon lamp, a black-light lamp or an LED lamp of an ultraviolet source. The electron beam system can irradiate a generator generated by an electron beam accelerator or the like. In this specification, the "energy ray curability" refers to the property of being hardened by irradiation of energy rays; the so-called "non-energy ray curability" is the property of not being hardened even if energy rays are irradiated.

支撐片的波長375nm光穿透率較佳係達30%以上、更佳係達50%以上、特佳係達70%以上。藉由上述光的穿透率在此種範圍內,當隔著支撐片對保護膜形成用薄膜照射能量線(紫外線)時,便更加提升保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化度。 支撐片的波長375nm光之穿透率上限值並無特別的限定。例如上述光的穿透率以在95%以下為佳。The light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 375 nm is preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%, and particularly good at more than 70%. When the light transmittance in this range is within this range, when the protective film forming film is irradiated with energy rays (ultraviolet rays) through the support sheet, the hardening degree of the protective film forming film is further improved. The upper limit of the transmittance of the light at a wavelength of 375 nm of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the light transmittance is preferably 95% or less.

支撐片的波長532nm光穿透率較佳係30%以上、更佳係50%以上、特佳係70%以上。藉由上述光的穿透率在此種範圍內,當隔著支撐片對保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜照射雷射光而在其上刻印時,可更清晰地刻印。 支撐片的波長532nm光之穿透率上限值並無特別的限定。例如上述光穿透率以在95%以下為佳。The light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 532 nm is preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%, and particularly preferably at least 70%. With the above-mentioned light transmittance within this range, when the protective film forming film or protective film is irradiated with laser light through the support sheet, it can be marked more clearly. The upper limit value of the transmittance of light of the support sheet at a wavelength of 532 nm is not particularly limited. For example, the above light transmittance is preferably 95% or less.

支撐片的波長1064nm光穿透率較佳係達30%以上、更佳係達50%以上、特佳係達70%以上。藉由上述光的穿透率在此種範圍內,當隔著支撐片對保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜照射雷射光而在其上刻印時,可更清晰地刻印。 支撐片的波長1064nm光之穿透率上限值並無特別的限定。例如上述光的穿透率以在95%以下為佳。The light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 1064 nm is preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%, and particularly good at more than 70%. With the above-mentioned light transmittance within this range, when the protective film forming film or protective film is irradiated with laser light through the support sheet, it can be marked more clearly. The upper limit value of the light transmittance of the wavelength of 1064 nm of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the light transmittance is preferably 95% or less.

支撐片的穿透清晰度較佳係達30以上、更佳係達100以上、特佳係達200以上。藉由上述穿透清晰度在此種範圍內,可更加輕易隔著支撐片確認保護膜形成用薄膜的浮起脫落、列印不良情況、及缺損等。 支撐片的穿透清晰度並無特別的限定。例如上述穿透清晰度可在430以下。 支撐片的穿透清晰度係可根據JIS K 7374-2007進行測定。The penetration clarity of the support sheet is preferably 30 or more, more preferably 100 or more, and especially 200 or more. With the above-mentioned penetration clarity within such a range, it is easier to confirm the lifting and falling of the protective film forming film, defective printing, and defects through the support sheet. The penetration clarity of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned penetration clarity may be below 430. The penetration clarity of the support sheet can be measured according to JIS K 7374-2007.

其次,針對構成支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片的各層進行詳細說明。Next, each layer constituting the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film will be described in detail.

○基材 上述基材係片狀或薄膜狀,且具有凹凸面。○Base material The above-mentioned base material is in the form of a sheet or a film, and has an uneven surface.

本說明書中,所謂「凹凸面」係指根據JIS B 0601:2013所規定的最大高度粗糙度Rz達0.01μm以上之面。 再者,所謂「平滑面」係指非為凹凸面,而是高平滑度的面,亦稱「非凹凸面」或「亮澤面」。例如平滑面包含具有不屬於上述凹凸面程度的極小凹凸度之面。In this specification, the "concavo-convex surface" refers to a surface having a maximum height roughness Rz of 0.01 μm or more specified in accordance with JIS B 0601:2013. Furthermore, the so-called "smooth surface" refers to a surface that is not uneven, but a high-smoothness surface, also known as a "non-concave surface" or "shiny surface". For example, a smooth surface includes a surface having extremely small unevenness that does not belong to the above-mentioned uneven surface.

基材係可僅其中一面為凹凸面,亦可雙面均為凹凸面,以僅其中一面為凹凸面為佳。換言之,上述基材中,以僅其中一面為平滑面為佳。支撐片中,基材的凹凸面成為設置黏著劑層側之一面。The base material may have only one of the surfaces being uneven, or both sides may have uneven surfaces, and it is preferred that only one of the surfaces be uneven. In other words, it is preferable that only one of the substrates is a smooth surface. In the support sheet, the uneven surface of the base material becomes one surface on the side where the adhesive layer is provided.

基材係可僅由1層(單層)構成,亦可由2層以上的複數層構成,當由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同,這些複數層的組合並無特別的限定。 當基材係由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層中,最外層之一面(最靠近黏著劑層之一面、或最靠近黏著劑層之一面與最遠離之一面的雙面)係成為上述凹凸面。The substrate system may be composed of only one layer (single layer), or may be composed of more than two plural layers. When composed of plural layers, these plural layer systems may be the same as or different from each other. The combination is not particularly limited. When the base material is composed of a plurality of layers, among the plurality of layers, one of the outermost layers (the side closest to the adhesive layer, or the two sides closest to the adhesive layer and the side farthest from the two sides) becomes the above-mentioned irregularities surface.

本說明書不僅侷限於基材的情況,所謂「複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同」係指「所有層可為相同、亦可所有層均不同、亦可僅其中一部分的層相同」;又,所謂「複數層相互不同」係指「各層的構成材料與厚度中之至少其中一者係相互不同」。This specification is not limited to the case of the substrate. The so-called "multiple layer systems may be the same or different from each other" means "all layers may be the same, all layers may be different, or only some of the layers may be the same" ; Also, the so-called "multiple layers are different from each other" means "at least one of the constituent materials and thickness of each layer is different from each other."

基材設有黏著劑層之一側的凹凸面(第1面)中,根據JIS B 0601:2013所測定的最大高度粗糙度(Rz),較佳係0.01~8μm、更佳係0.1~7μm、特佳係0.5~6μm。藉由基材的上述Rz達上述下限值以上,抑制單獨將基材捲取為捲筒狀、解捲時發生不良情況。又,在支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的製造過程中,關於含基材的積層物亦同樣地抑制捲取、解捲時發生不良情況。另一方面,藉由基材的上述Rz在上述上限值以下,便可使黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性均更良好。The maximum height roughness (Rz) measured according to JIS B 0601:2013 on the uneven surface (first surface) on which the adhesive layer is provided on one side of the substrate is preferably 0.01 to 8 μm and more preferably 0.1 to 7 μm , The special good line is 0.5~6μm. By the Rz of the base material being equal to or higher than the lower limit value, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects when the base material is wound into a roll shape alone and unwound. In addition, in the manufacturing process of the support sheet or the composite sheet for forming a protective film, the laminate containing the base material is similarly prevented from causing defects during winding and unwinding. On the other hand, when the Rz of the base material is below the upper limit value, the lamination of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film and the marking inspection of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet can be performed Sex is better.

當基材的雙面均為凹凸面的情況,此雙面的凹凸度係相互可為相同、亦可為不同。When both sides of the base material are uneven surfaces, the unevenness of the two sides may be the same or different.

上述基材的構成材料係可舉例如各種樹脂。 上述樹脂係可舉例如:低密度聚乙烯(LDPE)、直鏈低密度聚乙烯(LLDPE)、高密度聚乙烯(HDPE)等聚乙烯;聚丙烯、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚甲基戊烯、降莰烯樹脂等聚乙烯以外的聚烯烴;乙烯-醋酸乙烯酯共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物、乙烯-降莰烯共聚物等乙烯系共聚物(單體係使用乙烯所獲得的共聚物);聚氯乙烯、氯乙烯共聚物等氯乙烯系樹脂(單體係使用氯乙烯所獲得的樹脂);聚苯乙烯;聚環烯烴;聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯、聚間苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚2,6-萘二羧酸乙二酯、所有構成單元均具有芳香族環式基的全芳香族聚酯等聚酯;上述聚酯2種以上的共聚物;聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚氨酯;聚氨酯丙烯酸酯;聚醯亞胺;聚醯胺;聚碳酸酯;氟樹脂;聚縮醛;改質聚伸苯醚;聚苯硫醚;聚碸;聚醚酮等。 再者,上述樹脂亦可舉例如由上述聚酯與其外的樹脂的混合物等 聚合物摻合物(polymer alloy)。上述聚酯與其外的樹脂的聚合物摻合物,較佳係聚酯以外的樹脂量屬於較少量。 再者,上述樹脂亦可舉例如:由截至目前為止所例示上述樹脂中之1種或2種以上交聯後的交聯樹脂;使用截至目前為止所例示上述樹脂中之1種或2種以上的離子聚合物等改質樹脂。Examples of the constituent material system of the base material include various resins. Examples of the above resin system include polyethylenes such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE), and high-density polyethylene (HDPE); polypropylene, polybutene, polybutadiene, and polymethylmethacrylate Polyolefins other than polyethylene such as amylpentene and norbornene resin; ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylic acid copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylate copolymer, ethylene-norbornene Vinyl copolymers such as copolymers (copolymers obtained by using ethylene in a single system); vinyl chloride resins such as polyvinyl chloride and vinyl chloride copolymers (resins obtained by using vinyl chloride in a single system); polystyrene; Polycycloolefin; polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polyethylene 2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate Polyesters such as esters, wholly aromatic polyesters having an aromatic ring group in all constituent units; copolymers of two or more of the above polyesters; poly(meth)acrylates; polyurethanes; polyurethane acrylates; polyimides Polyamide; Polycarbonate; Fluorine resin; Polyacetal; Modified polyphenylene ether; Polyphenylene sulfide; Polyphenolic; Polyether ketone, etc. In addition, the resin may also be a polymer alloy such as a mixture of the polyester and the resin outside. The polymer blend of the above-mentioned polyester and the resin outside thereof is preferably a relatively small amount of resin other than polyester. In addition, the above-mentioned resin may also be exemplified by a cross-linked resin cross-linked after one or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified so far; one or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified so far are used Modified resins such as ionic polymers.

本說明書中,所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸」係包含「丙烯酸」與「甲基丙烯酸」雙方的概念。關於(甲基)丙烯酸的類似用詞亦同,例如所謂「(甲基)丙烯醯基」係包含「丙烯醯基」與「甲基丙烯醯基」雙方的概念;所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」係包含「丙烯酸酯」與「甲基丙烯酸酯」雙方的概念。In this specification, the term "(meth)acrylic acid" includes the concepts of both "acrylic acid" and "methacrylic acid". Similar terms for (meth)acrylic acid are also the same. For example, the so-called "(meth)acryloyl" includes the concepts of both "acryloyl" and "methacryloyl"; the so-called "(meth)acrylic" "Ester" includes the concepts of both "acrylate" and "methacrylate".

構成基材的樹脂係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The resin system constituting the base material may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

基材的厚度較佳係在50~300μm範圍內、更佳係在60~150μm範圍內。藉由基材的厚度在此種範圍內,便可更加提升上述保護膜形成用複合片的可撓性、對半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的貼附性。 如上述,因為基材具有凹凸面,因而其厚度係依照基材的部位會有變動。所以,基材厚度的最小值可達上述下限值以上,且基材厚度的最大值可在上述上限值以下。 另外,所謂「基材厚度」係指基材全體的厚度,例如由複數層構成的基材厚度,係指構成基材的所有層之合計厚度。The thickness of the substrate is preferably in the range of 50 to 300 μm, and more preferably in the range of 60 to 150 μm. When the thickness of the base material is within such a range, the flexibility of the composite sheet for forming a protective film and the adhesion to a semiconductor wafer or a semiconductor wafer can be further improved. As described above, since the base material has an uneven surface, its thickness varies depending on the position of the base material. Therefore, the minimum value of the thickness of the substrate can be above the above lower limit, and the maximum value of the thickness of the substrate can be below the above upper limit. In addition, the "base material thickness" refers to the thickness of the entire base material, for example, the thickness of the base material composed of a plurality of layers, refers to the total thickness of all layers constituting the base material.

基材的厚度係例如使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察基材的側面或截面便可測定。 基材的截面係例如依照與上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片截面情況之同樣方法便可形成。The thickness of the base material can be measured by observing the side surface or cross section of the base material using, for example, a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross section of the base material can be formed, for example, in the same manner as the cross section of the test piece of the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a support sheet and a protective film.

例如依照與先前所說明方法同樣,從支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的複數個地方(例如5個地方)切取試驗片,針對此試驗片求取基材厚度的最小值與最大值,再從這些數值進一步求取這些最小值平均值與最大值平均值時,上述最小值平均值可在上述基材厚度的下限值以上,上述最大值平均值亦可在上述基材厚度的上限值以下。For example, in the same manner as the method described above, the test piece is cut from a plurality of places (for example, 5 places) of the support sheet or the protective film forming composite sheet, and the minimum and maximum thickness of the base material are obtained for this test piece. When these minimum and maximum average values are further obtained from these values, the minimum average value may be greater than the lower limit of the thickness of the substrate, and the average maximum value may also be the upper limit of the thickness of the substrate Below the value.

基材係除上述樹脂等主要的構成材料之外,亦可含有例如:填充材、著色劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、有機滑劑、觸媒、軟化劑(可塑劑)等公知各種添加劑。The base material may contain various well-known additives such as fillers, colorants, antistatic agents, antioxidants, organic slip agents, catalysts, and softeners (plasticizers) in addition to the main constituent materials such as the above resins.

基材較佳係透明。 基材係配合目的可被著色、亦可蒸鍍有其他的層。 例如保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性的情況,基材以使能量線穿透為佳。The substrate is preferably transparent. The base material may be colored according to the purpose, and may be vapor-deposited with other layers. For example, when the thin film for forming a protective film is energy-ray curable, it is preferable that the base material penetrate the energy line.

基材係為了提升與在其上面所設置的黏著劑層等直接接觸的層之密接性,亦可對表面施行例如:電暈放電處理、電子束照射處理、電漿處理、臭氧‧紫外線照射處理、火焰處理、鉻酸處理、熱風處理等氧化處理等等。 再者,基材的表面亦可施行底漆處理。 再者,基材係可具有抗靜電塗層;在重疊保護膜形成用複合片並保存時,可具有防止基材接著於其他片材、基材接著於吸附平台等的層等。In order to improve the adhesion of the layer directly in contact with the adhesive layer and the like provided on the substrate, the surface can also be subjected to corona discharge treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, plasma treatment, ozone and ultraviolet irradiation treatment, for example , Flame treatment, chromic acid treatment, hot air treatment and other oxidation treatment and so on. Furthermore, the surface of the substrate can also be treated with primer. Furthermore, the substrate system may have an antistatic coating; when the composite sheet for forming a protective film is stacked and stored, it may have a layer that prevents the substrate from adhering to other sheets, the substrate from adhering to a platform, and the like.

基材係可利用公知方法製造。例如含有樹脂的基材係藉由將含有上述樹脂的樹脂組成物施行成形便可製造。The substrate system can be produced by a known method. For example, a resin-containing substrate can be produced by molding a resin composition containing the resin.

當使用未具凹凸面的基材(換言之,雙面均為平滑面的基材)時,只要對基材的平滑面施行凹凸化處理便可。 凹凸化處理係可依照公知方法實施。例如使用具凹凸面的金屬輥或金屬板,藉由將其上述的凹凸面按壓於基材的平滑面,便可對基材的平滑面施行凹凸化處理。此時,以將已加熱狀態的金屬輥或金屬板按壓於基材的平滑面為佳。又,基材的平滑面亦可利用噴砂處理或溶劑處理等施行凹凸化處理。When a base material having no uneven surface (in other words, a base material having smooth surfaces on both sides) is used, the smooth surface of the base material may be subjected to uneven processing. The unevenness treatment can be carried out according to a known method. For example, by using a metal roll or metal plate with an uneven surface, by pressing the above-mentioned uneven surface against the smooth surface of the base material, the smooth surface of the base material can be subjected to the uneven surface treatment. At this time, it is preferable to press the heated metal roller or metal plate against the smooth surface of the base material. In addition, the smooth surface of the base material may be subjected to roughening treatment by sandblasting or solvent treatment.

○黏著劑層 上述黏著劑層係片狀或薄膜狀。 黏著劑層中,通常無論在基材與黏著劑層間有無設置中間層,均會受基材的上述凹凸面影響,導致至少臨基材之一面會成為凹凸面。○Adhesive layer The adhesive layer is in the form of a sheet or a film. In the adhesive layer, regardless of whether an intermediate layer is provided between the base material and the adhesive layer, it will be affected by the above-mentioned uneven surface of the base material, causing at least one surface adjacent to the base material to become an uneven surface.

黏著劑層係可由1層(單層)構成,亦可由2層以上的複數層構成,當由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同,且這些複數層的組合並無特別的限定。 當黏著劑層係由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層中的最外層之一面(最接近基材之一面)將成為上述凹凸面。The adhesive layer system may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of more than two layers. When composed of plural layers, these plural layers may be the same or different from each other, and the The combination is not particularly limited. When the adhesive layer is composed of a plurality of layers, one of the outermost layers of the plurality of layers (the surface closest to the substrate) will become the above-mentioned uneven surface.

此處,參照圖式,針對基材與黏著劑層進行更詳細說明。 圖4所示係本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片之示意放大剖視圖。在此,舉圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A為例進行說明。另外,圖4中省略圖示剝離薄膜。Here, referring to the drawings, the base material and the adhesive layer will be described in more detail. 4 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Here, the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 will be described as an example. In addition, the peeling film is not shown in FIG. 4.

如前所說明,基材11的第1面11a係凹凸面。而黏著劑層12係設置成直接接觸於基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a,黏著劑層12的第2面12b可輕易追隨基材11的第1面11a。所以,黏著劑層12的第2面12b亦呈凹凸面。As described above, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven surface. The adhesive layer 12 is disposed so as to directly contact the first surface (concavo-convex surface) 11a of the substrate 11, and the second surface 12 b of the adhesive layer 12 can easily follow the first surface 11 a of the substrate 11. Therefore, the second surface 12b of the adhesive layer 12 also has an uneven surface.

黏著劑層12的厚度Ta 並非固定,依照黏著劑層12的部位會有變動。此處,黏著劑層12的厚度最小值以符號Ta1 表示,黏著劑層12的厚度最大值以符號Ta2 表示。The thickness T a of the adhesive layer 12 is not fixed, and will vary depending on the location of the adhesive layer 12. Here, the minimum thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by the symbol T a1 , and the maximum thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by the symbol T a2 .

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,從其5個地方切取試驗片,在這5片試驗片形成截面,並就該新形成的截面分別求取黏著劑層的厚度最小值Ta1 與最大值Ta2 。然後,從至少5個Ta1 值求取其平均值(上述S值),較佳係達1.5μm以上,且從至少5個Ta2 值求取其平均值(上述L值),較佳係在9μm以下。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, test pieces were cut out from five places, cross sections were formed in these five test pieces, and the minimum thickness T a1 and the maximum value T of the adhesive layer were obtained for the newly formed cross sections. a2 . Then, the average value (the above S value) is obtained from at least 5 T a1 values, preferably 1.5 μm or more, and the average value (the above L value) is obtained from at least 5 T a2 values, preferably the value Below 9μm.

從保護膜形成用複合片1A切取試驗片、試驗片的截面形成、在上述截面的基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)的測定、以及黏著劑層厚度最小值Ta1 與最大值Ta2 的測定,係如前所說明,可依照與從尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片切取試驗片之情況同樣地實行。From the composite sheet for protective film formation 1A, a test piece, a cross-sectional formation of the test piece, the measurement of the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the base material and the adhesive layer of the above-mentioned cross section, and the minimum thickness of the adhesive layer T a1 and the maximum The measurement of the value T a2 is as described above, and can be carried out in the same manner as when a test piece is cut out from a support sheet that has not yet constituted a composite sheet for forming a protective film.

另外,尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之放大剖視圖,係與圖4中省略圖示保護膜形成用薄膜13的情況相同。In addition, the enlarged cross-sectional view of the support sheet that has not yet constituted the composite sheet for forming a protective film is the same as the case where the film 13 for forming a protective film is omitted in FIG. 4.

作為保護膜形成用複合片1A,此處顯示在基材11與黏著劑層12之間,存在有其未貼合的區域(本說明書中亦稱「未貼合區域」)91。但,即便保護膜形成用複合片1A具有此種未貼合區域91,在保護膜形成用複合片1A厚度方向的未貼合區域91大小、即基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)為0.5μm以下的保護膜形成用複合片1A,仍具有基材11與黏著劑層12間之良好密接性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的良好刻印檢視性。As the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, there is shown between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 that there is a non-bonded area (also referred to as “unbonded area” in this specification) 91. However, even if the protective film forming composite sheet 1A has such an unbonded area 91, the size of the unbonded area 91 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A, that is, the maximum value of the interlayer distance between the substrate and the adhesive layer ( d1) The composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film having a thickness of 0.5 μm or less still has good adhesion between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 and good marking visibility of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film via the support sheet.

另外,本說明書中,所謂「在保護膜形成用複合片厚度方向的未貼合區域大小」,係指「保護膜形成用複合片中,相鄰2層在上述片的厚度方向之層間距離」,有時簡稱「層間距離」。例如上述「在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之未貼合區域91大小」,係指「在上述片1A的厚度方向之基材11與黏著劑層12間的層間距離」。 當1個地方的未貼合區域大小(層間距離)有變動時,便將最大值採用為未貼合區域的大小(層間距離)。In addition, in this specification, the "size of the unattached region in the thickness direction of the composite sheet for forming a protective film" refers to "the distance between two adjacent layers in the thickness direction of the sheet in the composite sheet for forming a protective film" , Sometimes referred to as "interlayer distance". For example, the above-mentioned "size of the unattached region 91 in the thickness direction of the composite sheet for protective film formation 1A" means "the interlayer distance between the substrate 11 and the adhesive layer 12 in the thickness direction of the sheet 1A". When the size of the unattached area (interlayer distance) at one place changes, the maximum value is adopted as the size of the unattached area (interlayer distance).

未貼合區域的大小(層間距離)係可依照與例如上述基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)的情況同樣方法進行測定。即,依照與求取黏著劑層之R值時的相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片中形成截面,再在此截面便可求取未貼合區域的大小。或者,亦可在未製作試驗片情況下,以保護膜形成用複合片自體形成截面,再在此截面求取未貼合區域的大小。The size of the unlaminated area (interlayer distance) can be measured in the same manner as in the case of the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the substrate and the adhesive layer, for example. That is, a cross-section is formed in the test piece of the protective film forming composite sheet according to the same method as when obtaining the R value of the adhesive layer, and then the size of the unlaminated area can be obtained from this cross-section. Alternatively, in the case where no test piece is produced, a cross-section may be formed by the protective film-forming composite sheet itself, and then the size of the unlaminated area may be obtained from this cross-section.

未貼合區域91的大小(上述層間距離的最大值)係例如可為0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下中之任一者。The size of the non-laminated area 91 (the maximum value of the above-mentioned interlayer distance) may be, for example, any one of 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, 0.2 μm or less, and 0.1 μm or less.

保護膜形成用複合片1A亦有完全沒有存在未貼合區域91的情形。本說明書中,當未貼合區域大小達0.05μm以上時,便認定有存在未貼合區域,但當完全沒有存在未貼合區域91時,會有將未貼合區域91的大小(層間距離)記為0μm的情況。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, there may be no unbonded area 91 at all. In this specification, when the size of the unattached area is more than 0.05 μm, it is considered that there is an unattached area, but when there is no unattached area 91 at all, the size of the unattached area 91 (interlayer distance ) Case of 0 μm.

此處舉保護膜形成用複合片1A為例,針對基材與黏著劑層進行說明,但關於保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等其他實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況的基材與黏著劑層亦同。Here, the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation is taken as an example to describe the base material and the adhesive layer. However, the composite sheet for protective film formation in other embodiments, such as the composite sheet for protective film formation 1B and the composite sheet for protective film formation 1C, etc. In the case of the sheet, the base material and the adhesive layer are also the same.

黏著劑層的S值係在不致損及本發明效果之前提下,並無特別的限定,較佳係1.5μm以上且未滿9μm。更佳係1.7μm以上、特佳係1.9μm以上,例如可為2.3μm以上、2.7μm以上、3.1μm以上及3.5μm以上中之任一者。藉由上述S值達上述下限值以上,便可使黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性更良好。The S value of the adhesive layer is mentioned before it is not damaged and the effect of the present invention is not particularly limited, and it is preferably 1.5 μm or more and less than 9 μm. A more preferred system is 1.7 μm or more, and a particularly preferred system is 1.9 μm or more. For example, it may be any of 2.3 μm or more, 2.7 μm or more, 3.1 μm or more, and 3.5 μm or more. When the S value is equal to or higher than the lower limit value, the lamination property of the adhesive layer and the thin film for forming a protective film can be improved.

另一方面,黏著劑層的S值係可例如8μm以下。此種黏著劑層係可更輕易形成。On the other hand, the S value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 8 μm or less. Such an adhesive layer system can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的S值係可在上述較佳下限值與上限值任意組合設定的範圍內適當調整。例如黏著劑層的S值較佳係1.5~8μm、更佳係1.7~8μm、特佳係1.9~8μm,例如亦可為2.3~8μm、2.7~8μm、3.1~8μm及3.5~8μm中之任一者。但,這些僅為黏著劑層的S值一例而已。The S value of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted within a range set by any combination of the above-described preferred lower limit value and upper limit value. For example, the S value of the adhesive layer is preferably from 1.5 to 8 μm, more preferably from 1.7 to 8 μm, and particularly from 1.9 to 8 μm, for example, any of 2.3 to 8 μm, 2.7 to 8 μm, 3.1 to 8 μm, and 3.5 to 8 μm. One. However, these are only examples of the S value of the adhesive layer.

黏著劑層的L值係在不致損及本發明效果之前提下,並無特別的限定,較佳係9μm以下且大於1.5μm。更佳係8.6μm以下、特佳係8.3μm以下,例如可為7.7μm以下、7.3μm以下、6.9μm以下及6.5μm以下中之任一者。藉由上述L值在上述上限值以下,便可使保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性更良好。The L value of the adhesive layer is mentioned before it is not damaged and the effect of the present invention is not particularly limited, and it is preferably 9 μm or less and more than 1.5 μm. A more preferred system is 8.6 μm or less, and a particularly preferred system is 8.3 μm or less. For example, it may be any of 7.7 μm or less, 7.3 μm or less, 6.9 μm or less, and 6.5 μm or less. When the L value is equal to or lower than the upper limit value, the visibility of the engraving of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet can be improved.

另一方面,黏著劑層的L值亦可例如2.5μm以上。此種黏著劑層係可更輕易形成。On the other hand, the L value of the adhesive layer may be 2.5 μm or more, for example. Such an adhesive layer system can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的L值係可在上述較佳下限值與上限值任意組合設定的範圍內適當調整。例如黏著劑層的L值較佳係2.5~9μm、更佳係2.5~8.6μm、特佳係2.5~8.3μm,例如可為2.5~7.7μm、2.5~7.3μm、2.5~6.9μm及2.5~6.5μm中之任一者。The L value of the adhesive layer can be appropriately adjusted within the range set in any combination of the above-described preferred lower limit value and upper limit value. For example, the L value of the adhesive layer is preferably 2.5 to 9 μm, more preferably 2.5 to 8.6 μm, and particularly preferably 2.5 to 8.3 μm, such as 2.5 to 7.7 μm, 2.5 to 7.3 μm, 2.5 to 6.9 μm, and 2.5 to Any one of 6.5μm.

黏著劑層的厚度(例如Ta )係在不致損及本發明效果之前提下,並無特別的限定,以滿足上述S值與L值的條件為佳。 例如黏著劑層的厚度亦可為1.5~9μm。The thickness of the adhesive layer (for example, T a ) is mentioned before it is not damaged and the effects of the present invention are not particularly limited, and it is preferable to satisfy the above-mentioned conditions of the S value and the L value. For example, the thickness of the adhesive layer may also be 1.5-9 μm.

另外,所謂「黏著劑層的厚度」係指黏著劑層全體的厚度,例如由複數層構成的黏著劑層的厚度,便指構成黏著劑層的所有層之合計厚度。依照此種觀點規定上述黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值。In addition, the "thickness of the adhesive layer" refers to the thickness of the entire adhesive layer. For example, the thickness of the adhesive layer composed of a plurality of layers refers to the total thickness of all layers constituting the adhesive layer. From this viewpoint, the minimum and maximum thicknesses of the adhesive layer are specified.

黏著劑層係含有黏著劑。 上述黏著劑係可舉例如:丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等黏著性樹脂,較佳係丙烯酸系樹脂。The adhesive layer contains an adhesive. Examples of the adhesive system include acrylic resins, urethane resins, rubber resins, polysiloxane resins, epoxy resins, polyvinyl ethers, polycarbonates, and ester resins. Acrylic resins are preferred.

本說明書中,所謂「黏著性樹脂」係包含具黏著性樹脂與具接著性樹脂雙方的概念,例如不僅樹脂自體具有黏著性者,亦包含藉由併用添加劑等其他成分而呈現黏著性的樹脂、藉由熱或水等觸發物(trigger)存在而呈現接著性的樹脂等。In this specification, the term "adhesive resin" includes the concepts of both adhesive resins and adhesive resins. For example, not only those resins that have adhesive properties but also resins that exhibit adhesion by using additives such as additives in combination. , Resins that exhibit adhesion by the presence of a trigger such as heat or water.

黏著劑層較佳係呈透明。 黏著劑層亦可配合目的被著色。 例如當保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性的情況,黏著劑層以使能量線穿透為佳。The adhesive layer is preferably transparent. The adhesive layer can also be colored according to the purpose. For example, when the thin film for forming a protective film is hardenable by an energy ray, it is preferable that the adhesive layer penetrate the energy ray.

黏著劑層亦可使用能量線硬化性黏著劑形成,亦可使用非能量線硬化性黏著劑形成。使用能量線硬化性黏著劑形成的黏著劑層,可輕易調整硬化前與硬化後的物性。The adhesive layer may be formed using an energy ray hardening adhesive, or may be formed using a non-energy ray hardening adhesive. Adhesive layer formed with energy ray hardening adhesive can easily adjust the physical properties before and after hardening.

<<黏著劑組成物>> 黏著劑層可使用含有黏著劑的黏著劑組成物來形成。例如在黏著劑層形成標的面塗佈黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥,可在目標部位處形成黏著劑層。關於黏著劑層的更具體形成方法,會與其外之層的形成方法一併在後文詳述。黏著劑組成物中常溫下不會氣化之成分間的含量比率,通常同黏著劑層的上述成分間之含量比率。<<Adhesive composition>> The adhesive layer can be formed using an adhesive composition containing an adhesive. For example, the adhesive composition is coated on the surface of the adhesive layer where the target is formed, and if necessary, dried, the adhesive layer can be formed at the target site. The more specific method of forming the adhesive layer will be described in detail later together with the method of forming the outer layer. The content ratio between components in the adhesive composition that does not vaporize at ordinary temperature is usually the same as the content ratio between the above components in the adhesive layer.

本說明書中,所謂「常溫」係指不會特別冷、或特別熱的溫度,即平常的溫度,例如15~25℃的溫度等。In this specification, the "normal temperature" refers to a temperature that is not particularly cold or particularly hot, that is, an ordinary temperature, for example, a temperature of 15 to 25°C.

黏著劑組成物的塗佈係可利用公知方法實施,例如使用氣刀塗佈機(Air-knife-coater)、刮刀塗佈機(Blade-coater)、棒式塗佈機(Bar-coater)、凹版塗佈機(Gravure-coater)、輥式塗佈機(Roll-coater)、輥式刀塗機(Roll-knife-coater)、淋幕塗佈機(Curtain-coater)、模塗機(Die-Coater)、刀塗機(Knife-coater)、網版塗佈機(Screen-coater)、麥勒棒塗機(Meyer-bar-coater)、吻合式塗佈機(Kiss-coater)等各種塗佈機的方法。The coating system of the adhesive composition can be implemented by a known method, for example, using an air knife coating machine (Air-knife-coater), a blade coater (Blade-coater), a bar coater (Bar-coater), Gravure-coater, roll-coater, roll-knife-coater, curtain-coater, die coater -Coater), Knife-coater, Screen-coater, Meyer-bar-coater, Kiss-coater, etc. Cloth machine method.

黏著劑組成物的乾燥條件並無特別的限定,當黏著劑組成物係含有後述溶劑的情況,以施行加熱乾燥為佳。含有溶劑的黏著劑組成物是以以例如70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件施行乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the adhesive composition are not particularly limited, and when the adhesive composition contains a solvent described later, it is preferable to perform heat drying. The adhesive composition containing a solvent is preferably dried under conditions such as 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes.

當黏著劑層為能量線硬化性的情況,含有能量線硬化性黏著劑的黏著劑組成物(即,能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物),係可舉例如:含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)(以下簡稱「黏著性樹脂(I-1a)」)、與能量線硬化性化合物的黏著劑組成物(I-1);含有經在非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈導入不飽和基的能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)(以下簡稱「黏著性樹脂(I-2a)」)之黏著劑組成物(I-2);含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)與能量線硬化性化合物的黏著劑組成物(I-3)等。When the adhesive layer is energy ray curable, the adhesive composition containing the energy ray curable adhesive (ie, the energy ray curable adhesive composition) can be exemplified by: containing non-energy ray curable adhesive Resin (I-1a) (hereinafter referred to as "adhesive resin (I-1a)"), an adhesive composition (I-1) with an energy ray-curable compound; contains a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) I-1a) Adhesive composition (I-2) of energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) (hereinafter referred to as "adhesive resin (I-2a)") in which unsaturated groups are introduced into the side chain; contains The adhesive composition (I-3) of the above adhesive resin (I-2a) and the energy ray-curable compound, etc.

<黏著劑組成物(I-1)> 上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)係如上述,含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、與能量線硬化性化合物。<Adhesive composition (I-1)> As described above, the adhesive composition (I-1) contains a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) and an energy ray-curable compound.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 上述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)較佳係丙烯酸系樹脂。 上述丙烯酸系樹脂係可舉例如至少具有由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生的構成單元的丙烯酸系聚合體。 上述丙烯酸系樹脂所具有的構成單元係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,當2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably an acrylic resin. Examples of the acrylic resin include acrylic polymers having at least structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylate. The structural unit system of the acrylic resin may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,可列舉構成烷基酯的烷基碳數為1~20者,而上述烷基較佳係直鏈狀或分支鏈狀。 (甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯更具體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十九烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸廿烷基酯等。Examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate include those having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. More (meth)acrylic acid alkyl esters include, for example, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, ( N-butyl meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Hexyl ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate , Isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), ( Tridecyl meth)acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetane (meth)acrylate Ester (palmityl (meth)acrylate), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), deca(meth)acrylate Nine alkyl esters, eicosyl (meth) acrylate, etc.

就從提升黏著劑層的黏著力的觀點,上述丙烯酸系聚合體較佳係具有由上述烷基碳數4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生的構成單元。而,就從更加提升黏著劑層黏著力的觀點,上述烷基的碳數較佳係4~12、更佳係4~8。又,上述烷基碳數達4以上的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯較佳係丙烯酸烷基酯。From the viewpoint of enhancing the adhesive force of the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer preferably has a structural unit derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate having 4 or more alkyl carbon atoms. However, from the viewpoint of further enhancing the adhesive force of the adhesive layer, the carbon number of the alkyl group is preferably 4-12, and more preferably 4-8. In addition, the alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl carbon number of 4 or more is preferably an alkyl acrylate.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元之外,以還具有由含官能基單體所衍生的構成單元為佳。 上述含官能基單體,可列舉藉由上述官能基與後述交聯劑進行反應而成為交聯起點、藉由上述官能基與後述含不飽和基化合物中的不飽和基進行反應等,便可在丙烯酸系聚合體的側鏈中導入不飽和基者。In addition to the structural units derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate, the acrylic polymer preferably has structural units derived from the functional group-containing monomer. Examples of the functional group-containing monomer include reaction of the functional group with a cross-linking agent described later to become a cross-linking starting point, and reaction of the functional group with an unsaturated group in an unsaturated group-containing compound described below. An unsaturated group is introduced into the side chain of the acrylic polymer.

含官能基單體中的上述官能基係可舉例如:羥基、羧基、胺基、環氧基等。 即,含官能基單體係可舉例如:含羥基單體、含羧基單體、含胺基單體、含環氧基單體等。Examples of the functional group system in the functional group-containing monomer include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, and an epoxy group. That is, the functional group-containing single system includes, for example, hydroxyl group-containing monomers, carboxyl group-containing monomers, amine group-containing monomers, epoxy group-containing monomers, and the like.

上述含羥基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羥烷基酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇等非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(未具(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架的不飽和醇)等Examples of the above-mentioned hydroxyl-containing single system include hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid-3 -Hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, etc. ; Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol and allyl alcohol (unsaturated alcohols that do not have a (meth)acryloyl skeleton) etc.

上述含羧基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸、巴豆酸等乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵的單羧酸);反丁烯二酸、衣康酸、順丁烯二酸、檸康酸等乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具有乙烯性不飽和鍵的二羧酸);上述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酸酐;甲基丙烯酸-2-羧乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羧烷基酯等。Examples of the carboxyl-containing monosystem include: ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated bond) such as (meth)acrylic acid and crotonic acid; fumaric acid, itaconic acid, cis Ethylene unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as butenedioic acid and citraconic acid (dicarboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated bond); anhydrides of the above ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxyethyl methacrylate, etc. Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylate and the like.

含官能基單體較佳係含羥基單體、含羧基單體,更佳係含羥基單體。The functional group-containing monomer is preferably a hydroxyl group-containing monomer, a carboxyl group-containing monomer, and more preferably a hydroxyl group-containing monomer.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含官能基單體係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The functional group-containing single system constituting the acrylic polymer may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體中,由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的含量,相對於構成單元總量,較佳係1~35質量%、更佳係2~30質量%、特佳係3~27質量%。In the acrylic polymer, the content of the structural unit derived from the functional group-containing monomer is preferably 1 to 35% by mass, more preferably 2 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 3 to the total structural unit. 27% by mass.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體係由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元、及由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元之外,尚亦可更進一步具有由其他單體所衍生的構成單元。 上述其他單體係在能與(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等進行共聚之前提下,並無特別的限定。 上述其他單體係可舉例如:苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、甲酸乙烯酯、醋酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、丙烯醯胺等。In addition to the structural units derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate and the structural units derived from the functional group-containing monomer, the acrylic polymerization system may further have structural units derived from other monomers. The other single system mentioned above is not particularly limited until it can be copolymerized with alkyl (meth)acrylate or the like. Examples of the other single systems include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, vinyl formate, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, and acrylic amide.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體的上述其他單體係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The other single systems constituting the acrylic polymer may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體係可使用為上述非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)。 另一方面,使上述丙烯酸系聚合體中的官能基,與具能量線聚合性不飽和基(能量線聚合性基)的不飽和基含有化合物產生者,可使用上述能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。The acrylic polymer system can be used as the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a). On the other hand, if the functional group in the acrylic polymer and the unsaturated group having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group (energy ray polymerizable group) contain a compound generator, the energy ray-curable adhesive resin can be used (I-2a).

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含量較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係15~90質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, more preferably 10 to 95% by mass, and particularly preferably 15 to 90% by mass.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,係可舉例如具有能量線聚合性不飽和基,利用能量線照射便可硬化的單體或寡聚物。 能量線硬化性化合物中,單體係可舉例如:三羥甲基丙烷三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇六[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,4-丁二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,6-己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多元(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 能量線硬化性化合物中,寡聚物可列舉由上述所例示單體進行聚合而成的寡聚物等。 能量線硬化性化合物係就從分子量較大、不易使黏著劑層之儲存彈性模數降低的觀點,較佳係胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯、胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物。[Energy Ray Hardening Compound] The energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be, for example, a monomer or an oligomer that has an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group and can be cured by irradiation with energy ray. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, the single system may be exemplified by trimethylolpropane tri[(meth)acrylate], neopentyl alcohol (meth)acrylate, neopentyl alcohol tetra[(methyl) Acrylate], dipentaerythritol hexa[(meth)acrylate], 1,4-butanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,6-hexanediol (meth)acrylate, etc. Poly(meth)acrylate; urethane (meth)acrylate; polyester (meth)acrylate; polyether (meth)acrylate; epoxy (meth)acrylate, etc. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, oligomers include oligomers obtained by polymerizing the above-exemplified monomers. The energy ray-curable compound is preferably urethane (meth)acrylate, urethane (meth)acrylate from the viewpoint of having a large molecular weight and not easy to reduce the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive layer. Oligomer.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The energy ray-curable compound system contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,上述能量線硬化性化合物的含量較佳係1~95質量%、更佳係5~90質量%、特佳係10~85質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 5 to 90% by mass, and particularly preferably 10 to 85% by mass.

[交聯劑] 黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元之外,更進一步使用具有由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體時,黏著劑組成物(I-1)較佳係更進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] When the adhesive resin (I-1a) is a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, and the acrylic polymer having the structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is further used, the adhesive composition The substance (I-1) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent.

上述交聯劑係例如與上述官能基產生反應,而使黏著性樹脂(I-1a)彼此間進行交聯者。 交聯劑係可舉例如:二異氰酸甲苯酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯、這些二異氰酸酯的加成體等異氰酸酯系交聯劑(具異氰酸酯基之交聯劑);乙二醇環氧丙醚等環氧系交聯劑(具環氧丙基之交聯劑);六[1-(2-甲基)-吖丙啶基]三磷酸三嗪等氮丙啶系交聯劑(具吖丙啶基之交聯劑);鋁螯合等金屬螯合系交聯劑(具金屬螯合構造之交聯劑);異三聚氰酸酯系交聯劑(具異三聚氰酸骨架之交聯劑)等。 就從提升黏著劑凝聚力,俾提升黏著劑層黏著力的觀點,以及可輕易取得等觀點,交聯劑較佳係異氰酸酯系交聯劑。The above-mentioned cross-linking agent reacts with the above-mentioned functional group, for example, and causes the adhesive resins (I-1a) to cross-link with each other. Examples of the crosslinking agent system include isocyanate-based crosslinking agents such as toluene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, and adducts of these diisocyanates. (Crosslinking agent); epoxy-based crosslinking agent such as ethylene glycol glycidyl ether (crosslinking agent with glycidyl group); hexa[1-(2-methyl)-aziridinyl]triphosphate triphosphate Azine and other aziridine-based cross-linking agents (cross-linking agents with aziridine group); metal chelate-based cross-linking agents such as aluminum chelate (cross-linking agents with metal chelation structure); isocyanurates It is a cross-linking agent (cross-linking agent with isocyanuric acid skeleton), etc. From the viewpoints of enhancing the cohesive force of the adhesive, improving the adhesion of the adhesive layer, and easily available, the crosslinking agent is preferably an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的交聯劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The crosslinking agent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,交聯劑的含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~50質量份、更佳係0.1~20質量份、特佳係0.3~15質量份。In the above adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). 、 0.3~15 parts by mass of Tejia.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)亦可更進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組成物(I-1)即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,仍充分進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization initiator] The adhesive composition (I-1) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-1) containing a photopolymerization initiator sufficiently undergoes a hardening reaction even when irradiated with a lower energy energy line such as ultraviolet rays.

上述光聚合起始劑係可舉例如:苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻安息香酸、苯偶姻安息香酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲縮酮等苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮等苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦等醯化氧化膦化合物;苄基苯硫醚、單硫化四甲胺硫甲醯等硫醚化合物;1-羥環己基苯酮等α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等二茂鈦化合物;氧硫𠮿

Figure 02_image001
等氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
化合物;過氧化合物;二乙醯等二酮化合物;苄基;二苄基;二苯基酮;2,4-二乙基氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
;1,2-二苯甲烷;2-羥-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。 再者,上述光聚合起始劑亦可使用例如:1-氯蒽醌等醌化合物;胺等光增感劑等。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator system include benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, benzoin benzoin Methyl acid, benzoin dimethyl ketal and other benzoin compounds; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1-one, 2,2-dimethoxy- Acetophenone compounds such as 1,2-diphenylethane-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenylphosphine oxide, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzene Acetyl phosphine oxide compounds such as methyl diphenyl phosphine oxide; thio ether compounds such as benzyl phenyl sulfide, tetramethylamine thiomethyl monosulfide; α-ketol compounds such as 1-hydroxycyclohexyl benzophenone; azo Azo compounds such as bisisobutyronitrile; titaniumocene compounds such as titanocene; oxygen and sulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
Isotope sulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
Compounds; Peroxy compounds; Diketones such as diethyl acetyl; benzyl; dibenzyl; diphenyl ketone; 2,4-diethyl oxysulfide
Figure 02_image001
; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone and so on. In addition, as the photopolymerization initiator, for example, a quinone compound such as 1-chloroanthraquinone; a light sensitizer such as amine; and the like can also be used.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的光聚合起始劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator system contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,光聚合起始劑的含量,相對於上述能量線硬化性化合物含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.03~10質量份、特佳係0.05~5質量份。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.03 to 10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the energy ray-curable compound content. The special grade is 0.05~5 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有未屬於上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 上述其他添加劑係可舉例如:抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、軟化劑(可塑劑)、填充材(填料)、防銹劑、著色劑(顏料、染料)、增感劑、賦黏劑、反應阻滯劑、交聯促進劑(觸媒)等公知添加劑。 另外,所謂「反應阻滯劑」係抑制例如因在黏著劑組成物(I-1)中混入的觸媒作用,造成保存中的黏著劑組成物(I-1)進行非為目的之交聯反應。反應阻滯劑可列舉例如利用螯合對觸媒形成螯合錯合物者,更具體可列舉1分子中具有2個以上羰基(-C(=O)-)者。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-1) is within the range not detrimental to the effects of the present invention, and may contain other additives not belonging to any of the above-mentioned components. Examples of the above-mentioned other additives include antistatic agents, antioxidants, softeners (plasticizers), fillers (fillers), rust inhibitors, colorants (pigments, dyes), sensitizers, tackifiers, reaction resistance Known additives such as retarders and crosslinking accelerators (catalysts). In addition, the so-called "reaction retarder" is to prevent unintended crosslinking of the adhesive composition (I-1) during storage due to, for example, the catalyst action mixed in the adhesive composition (I-1) reaction. The reaction retarder may be, for example, a chelate complex formed by a chelate on a catalyst, and more specifically, one having two or more carbonyl groups (-C(=O)-) in one molecule.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The other additive system contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑含量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1) is not particularly limited, as long as the type of compounding is appropriately selected.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)亦可含有溶劑。黏著劑組成物(I-1)係藉由含有溶劑,而提升對塗佈標的面的塗佈適性。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-1) may contain a solvent. By containing a solvent, the adhesive composition (I-1) improves the coating suitability for the surface to be coated.

上述溶劑較佳係有機溶劑,而上述有機溶劑係可舉例如:甲乙酮、丙酮等酮;醋酸乙酯等酯(羧酸酯);四氫呋喃、二㗁烷等醚;環己烷、正己烷等脂肪族烴;甲苯、二甲苯等芳香族烴;1-丙醇、2-丙醇等醇等等。The above solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Examples of the above organic solvent include ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone and acetone; esters (carboxylates) such as ethyl acetate; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane; and fats such as cyclohexane and n-hexane. Group hydrocarbons; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; alcohols such as 1-propanol and 2-propanol;

上述溶劑係例如可在黏著性樹脂(I-1a)製造時所使用者未從黏著性樹脂(I-1a)去除情況下,直接使用於黏著劑組成物(I-1),亦可在黏著劑組成物(I-1)製造時,另行添加與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)製造時所使用者相同或不同種類的溶劑。The above-mentioned solvent system can be directly used for the adhesive composition (I-1) without removing from the adhesive resin (I-1a) when the user does not remove the adhesive resin (I-1a) during the manufacture of the adhesive resin (I-1a). In the production of the agent composition (I-1), a solvent of the same or different type as the user used in the production of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is separately added.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑含量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-1) is not particularly limited, as long as it is adjusted appropriately.

<黏著劑組成物(I-2)> 上述黏著劑組成物(I-2)係如上述,含有在非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈導入不飽和基後的能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。<Adhesive composition (I-2)> The adhesive composition (I-2) is as described above and contains an energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) after introducing an unsaturated group into the side chain of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) .

[黏著性樹脂(I-2a)] 上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)係例如藉由使黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基,與具能量線聚合性不飽和基的含不飽和基化合物進行反應便可獲得。[Adhesive resin (I-2a)] The above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) with an unsaturated group-containing compound having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group.

上述含不飽和基化合物係上述能量線聚合性不飽和基之外,更進一步具有藉由與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基進行反應,便能與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)鍵結之基的化合物。 上述能量線聚合性不飽和基係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基(亦稱「ethenyl group」)、烯丙基(亦稱「2-丙烯基」)等,較佳係(甲基)丙烯醯基。 能與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中之官能基鍵結的基,係可舉例如:能與羥基或胺基鍵結的異氰酸酯基及環氧丙基、以及能與羧基或環氧基鍵結的羥基及胺基等。The above-mentioned unsaturated group-containing compound is in addition to the above-mentioned energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group, and further has a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) to react with the adhesive resin (I-1a) Bonding compound. Examples of the energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group system include (meth)acryloyl group, vinyl group (also known as "ethenyl group"), allyl group (also known as "2-propenyl group"), etc. Preferred systems (Meth) acrylamide. The group capable of bonding with the functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) includes, for example, isocyanate group and epoxypropyl group which can bond with hydroxyl group or amine group, and bond with carboxyl group or epoxy group Bonded hydroxyl and amine groups.

上述含不飽和基化合物係可舉例如:異氰酸(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing compound system include (meth)acryloyloxyethyl isocyanate, (meth)acryloyl isocyanate, and glycidyl (meth)acrylate.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The adhesive resin (I-2a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含量,相對於黏著劑組成物(I-2)總質量,較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係10~90質量%。The content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) in the adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass and more preferably 10 to 95 relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-2) Mass%, 10~90 mass% of Tejia.

[交聯劑] 黏著性樹脂(I-2a)係使用例如與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中同樣之具有由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體時,黏著劑組成物(I-2)亦可更進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] For the adhesive resin (I-2a), for example, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer as in the adhesive resin (I-1a), the adhesive composition (I-2 ) May further contain a crosslinking agent.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述交聯劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的交聯劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的交聯劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be the same as the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The crosslinking agent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的交聯劑含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~50質量份、更佳係0.1~20質量份、特佳係0.3~15質量份。The content of the cross-linking agent in the adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). The super good line is 0.3~15 parts by mass.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-2)亦可更進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組成物(I-2)係即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,仍充分進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization initiator] The adhesive composition (I-2) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-2) containing a photopolymerization initiator is sufficiently cured even when irradiated with low-energy energy rays such as ultraviolet rays.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的光聚合起始劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的光聚合起始劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be the same as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator system contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的光聚合起始劑含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.03~10質量份、特佳係0.05~5質量份。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 0.01-20 parts by mass and more preferably 0.03-10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). 、0.05~5 parts by mass of Tejia.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-2)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述其他添加劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-2) is within the range not detrimental to the effects of the present invention, and may contain other additives not affiliated with any of the above-mentioned components. The other additives in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be the same as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additive system contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的其他添加劑含量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-2) is not particularly limited, as long as the type of compounding is appropriately selected.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-2)係在與黏著劑組成物(I-1)情況的同樣目的下,亦可含有溶劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述溶劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的溶劑含量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-2) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be the same as the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected. The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-2) is not particularly limited, as long as it is adjusted appropriately.

<黏著劑組成物(I-3)> 上述黏著劑組成物(I-3)係如上述,含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)與能量線硬化性化合物。<Adhesive composition (I-3)> The adhesive composition (I-3) is as described above, and contains the adhesive resin (I-2a) and the energy ray-curable compound.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含量,相對於黏著劑組成物(I-3)總質量,較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係15~90質量%。The content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) in the adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass and more preferably 10 to 95 relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-3) Mass %, 15~90 mass% of the special good department.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可列舉具有能量線聚合性不飽和基、利用能量線照射便可硬化的單體及寡聚物,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有能量線硬化性化合物相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Energy Ray Hardening Compound] The above energy ray-curable compounds contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) include monomers and oligomers which have an energy-ray polymerizable unsaturated group and can be hardened by irradiation with energy rays, and examples include adhesives The energy ray-curable compound contained in the composition (I-1) is the same. The energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的上述能量線硬化性化合物含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~300質量份、更佳係0.03~200質量份、特佳係0.05~100質量份。The content of the energy ray-curable compound in the adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 0.01 to 300 parts by mass and more preferably 0.03 to 200 parts relative to the adhesive resin (I-2a) content of 100 parts by mass. Parts by mass, 0.05 to 100 parts by mass.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)亦可更進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組成物(I-3)係即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,仍充分進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization initiator] The adhesive composition (I-3) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-3) containing a photopolymerization initiator sufficiently undergoes a hardening reaction even when irradiated with low-energy energy rays such as ultraviolet rays.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的光聚合起始劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的光聚合起始劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be the same as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator system contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的光聚合起始劑含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)與上述能量線硬化性化合物的總含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.03~10質量份、特佳係0.05~5質量份。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the total content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) and the above energy ray-curable compound. , More preferably, it is 0.03~10 parts by mass, and especially, it is 0.05~5 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 上述其他添加劑可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-3) is within the range that does not damage and the effect of the present invention, and may contain other additives that are not affiliated with any of the above components. The other additives mentioned above may be the same as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additive system contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的其他添加劑含量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-3) is not particularly limited, as long as the type of compounding is appropriately selected.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)係在與黏著劑組成物(I-1)情況的同樣目的下,亦可含有溶劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的溶劑含量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected. The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-3) is not particularly limited, as long as it is adjusted appropriately.

<黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物> 截至目前主要針對黏著劑組成物(I-1)、黏著劑組成物(I-2)及黏著劑組成物(I-3)進行說明,惟已說明的這些含有成分,仍同樣可使用在這3種黏著劑組成物以外的所有黏著劑組成物(本說明書中亦稱「黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物」)。<Adhesive composition other than adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-3)> Up to now, it mainly focuses on the adhesive composition (I-1), the adhesive composition (I-2) and the adhesive composition (I-3), but these described components can still be used here. All adhesive compositions other than the three types of adhesive compositions (also referred to as "adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3)" in this specification).

黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物係能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物之外,亦可列舉非能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物。 非能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物係可舉例如含有:丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的黏著劑組成物(I-4),較佳係含有丙烯酸系樹脂。The adhesive composition other than the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) is an energy ray-curable adhesive composition, and non-energy ray-curable adhesive compositions can also be cited. The non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition system includes, for example, acrylic resin, urethane resin, rubber resin, polysiloxane resin, epoxy resin, polyvinyl ether, polycarbonate, ester The adhesive composition (I-4) of a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) such as a resin is preferably an acrylic resin.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物,較佳係含有1種或2種以上的交聯劑,且含量係可設為與上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)等的情況相同。The adhesive composition other than the adhesive composition (I-1) to (I-3) preferably contains one kind or two or more kinds of crosslinking agents, and the content can be set as the above-mentioned adhesive composition ( I-1) etc. are the same.

<黏著劑組成物(I-4)> 黏著劑組成物(I-4)較佳可列舉例如含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)與交聯劑者。<Adhesive composition (I-4)> The adhesive composition (I-4) preferably includes, for example, those containing the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-1a) and a crosslinking agent.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a),可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be the same as the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-1). The adhesive resin (I-1a) system contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含量,相對於黏著劑組成物(I-4)的總質量,較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係15~90質量%。The content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-4) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass and more preferably 10 to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-4). 95% by mass, 15-90% by mass of the Tejia line.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含量相對於溶劑以外所有成分總含量的比例(即,黏著劑層的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含量),較佳係30~90質量%、更佳係40~85質量%、特佳係50~80質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the ratio of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (ie, the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive layer) is preferably 30 to 90% by mass, more preferably 40 to 85% by mass, and 50 to 80% by mass.

[交聯劑] 黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元之外,更進一步使用具有由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體時,黏著劑組成物(I-4)較佳係更進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] When the adhesive resin (I-1a) is a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, and the acrylic polymer having the structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is further used, the adhesive composition The substance (I-4) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的交聯劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)的交聯劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的交聯劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be the same as the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The crosslinking agent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的交聯劑含量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~50質量份、更佳係0.3~50質量份、特佳係1~50質量份,例如可為10~50質量份、15~50質量份、及20~50質量份等中之任一者。The content of the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-4) is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). The super good system is 1-50 parts by mass, for example, any one of 10-50 parts by mass, 15-50 parts by mass, and 20-50 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-4)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 上述其他添加劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-4) is within the range that does not damage and the effect of the present invention, and may contain other additives that are not affiliated with any of the above components. The other additives mentioned above may be the same as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additive system contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的其他添加劑含量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-4) is not particularly limited, as long as the type of compounding is appropriately selected.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-4)係在與黏著劑組成物(I-1)情況的同樣目的下,亦可含有溶劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的上述溶劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的溶劑含量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。[Solvent] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be the same as the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected. The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-4) is not particularly limited, as long as it is adjusted appropriately.

上述保護膜形成用複合片中,黏著劑層較佳係非能量線硬化性。理由係若黏著劑層為能量線硬化性,則當利用能量線照射而使保護膜形成用薄膜硬化時,有無法抑制黏著劑層亦同時硬化的情形。若黏著劑層會與保護膜形成用薄膜同時硬化,則硬化後的保護膜形成用薄膜(即保護膜)與黏著劑層會在其界面出現無法剝離程度的貼附。此情況,較難將背面設有硬化後保護膜形成用薄膜(即保護膜)的半導體晶片(具保護膜之半導體晶片),從包括硬化後黏著劑層的支撐片剝離,導致具保護膜之半導體晶片無法正常拾取。上述支撐片中,將黏著劑層設為非能量線硬化性,便可確實迴避此種不良情況,俾能更輕易地拾取具保護膜之半導體晶片。In the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer is preferably non-energy ray-curable. The reason is that if the adhesive layer is energy ray-curable, when the film for forming a protective film is cured by irradiation with energy ray, the adhesive layer may not be cured simultaneously. If the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film are cured at the same time, the film for forming a protective film (that is, the protective film) and the adhesive layer after hardening will be attached at the interface to the extent that they cannot be peeled off. In this case, it is difficult to peel off the semiconductor wafer (semiconductor wafer with a protective film) provided with a thin film for forming a protective film after hardening (ie, a protective film) on the back surface, resulting in the protective film The semiconductor wafer cannot be picked up normally. In the above-mentioned support sheet, the adhesive layer is made non-energy ray hardenable, so that such a defect can be avoided and the semiconductor wafer with a protective film can be picked up more easily.

此處雖針對黏著劑層係非能量線硬化性時的效果進行說明,但即便與支撐片之保護膜形成用薄膜直接接觸的層係黏著劑層以外的層,只要此層係非能量線硬化性,仍可達同樣效果。Although the effect of the adhesive layer system on non-energy ray hardening is described here, even if the layer directly in contact with the protective film forming film of the support sheet is a layer other than the adhesive layer, as long as the layer is non-energy ray hardening Sex, still achieve the same effect.

<<黏著劑組成物之製造方法>> 黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)、黏著劑組成物(I-4)等除黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物,係藉由將上述黏著劑、與視需要的上述黏著劑以外的成分等構成黏著劑組成物的各成分,予以摻合便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Production method of adhesive composition>> Adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3), adhesive compositions (I-4) and other adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) It can be obtained by blending the above-mentioned adhesive agent, components other than the above-mentioned adhesive agent, etc., which constitute the adhesive agent composition, as necessary. The order of addition of each component during blending is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When a solvent is used, the solvent can be mixed with any of the blended components other than the solvent, and then the blended component can be used after pre-dilution, or it can be used without pre-dilution of any blended component other than the solvent. The solvent is mixed with these blending components. At the time of blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade and mixing; a method of mixing using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves, etc. It is appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each blending component does not deteriorate, as long as it is appropriately adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

◎保護膜形成用薄膜 上述保護膜形成用薄膜係藉由硬化、或未硬化而維持原狀態下形成保護膜。此保護膜係供保護半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的背面(與電極形成面的相反側的面)用。保護膜形成用薄膜係軟質,可輕易貼附於貼附標的物上。◎Protective film forming film The above-mentioned thin film for forming a protective film forms a protective film by curing or uncuring to maintain the original state. This protective film is for protecting the semiconductor wafer or the back surface of the semiconductor wafer (the surface opposite to the electrode formation surface). The thin film for forming a protective film is soft and can be easily attached to the object to be attached.

上述保護膜形成用薄膜係可為硬化性、亦可為非硬化性。 硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜係可為熱硬化性及能量線硬化性中之任一者、亦可具有熱硬化性與能量線硬化性雙方特性。 保護膜形成用薄膜係使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組成物便可形成。The thin film system for forming a protective film may be curable or non-curable. The thin film for forming a curable protective film may be any of thermosetting and energy ray hardening, and may have both the characteristics of thermosetting and energy ray hardening. The thin film for forming a protective film can be formed using a composition for forming a protective film containing its constituent material.

本說明書中,所謂「非硬化性」係指不管利用加熱、能量線照射等任何手段均不會硬化的性質。 本發明中,在即便將保護膜形成用薄膜硬化後,仍可維持支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之硬化物(換言之,支撐片與保護膜)的積層構造前提下,將此積層體稱為「保護膜形成用複合片」。In this specification, the term "non-hardening" refers to the property that it does not harden regardless of any means such as heating or energy beam irradiation. In the present invention, even after the thin film for forming a protective film is cured, the laminated structure of the cured product of the support sheet and the thin film for forming a protective film (in other words, the supporting sheet and the protective film) can be maintained. "Composite sheet for forming protective film".

保護膜形成用薄膜係不管種類如何,均可由1層(單層)構成、亦可由2層以上的複數層構成。當保護膜形成用薄膜係由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同。The thin film system for forming a protective film may be composed of one layer (single layer) regardless of the type, or plural layers of two or more layers. When the thin film for forming a protective film is composed of a plurality of layers, these plurality of layers may be the same or different from each other.

此處,再度參照圖4,針對黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜更進一步詳細說明。 如前所說明,基材11的第1面11a係凹凸面。但,黏著劑層12係藉由其S值達例如1.5μm以上,便抑制此凹凸面的影響,降低黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度。例如即便在黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13之間,存在有這些未貼合的區域(未貼合區域)92,但其數量在橫跨保護膜形成用複合片1A中的保護膜形成用薄膜13形成區域總域中,仍在3處以下等極少狀態。上述未貼合區域92係例如從基材11側觀察保護膜形成用複合片1A便可輕易確認。Here, referring to FIG. 4 again, the adhesive layer and the thin film for forming a protective film will be described in further detail. As described above, the first surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven surface. However, the adhesive layer 12 suppresses the influence of the uneven surface by the S value of 1.5 μm or more, and reduces the unevenness of the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12. For example, even if there are unbonded areas (unbonded areas) 92 between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film, the number of them is across the protective film in the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film In the total area of the formation region of the thin film 13 for formation, there are still very few conditions such as 3 or less. The non-bonded region 92 can be easily confirmed by viewing the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film from the base material 11 side, for example.

再者,保護膜形成用複合片1A係即便具有此種未貼合區域92,在保護膜形成用複合片1A厚度方向的未貼合區域92大小(層間距離最大值)為例如0.5μm以下之保護膜形成用複合片1A,其黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13間之積層性更良好。此處所謂「未貼合區域92大小(層間距離最大值)」,係指「在保護膜形成用複合片1A厚度方向,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13間之層間距離的最大值」。In addition, even if the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation has such an unattached region 92, the size (maximum interlayer distance) of the unattached region 92 in the thickness direction of the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation is, for example, 0.5 μm or less. In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the lamination property between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film is better. The "size of the unattached region 92 (maximum interlayer distance)" here refers to "the maximum value of the interlayer distance between the adhesive layer 12 and the protective film forming film 13 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A ".

未貼合區域92的大小(上述層間距離最大值),係與上述未貼合區域91的上述層間距離最大值(大小)同樣,較佳係0.5μm以下,例如可為0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下中之任一者。The size of the unattached area 92 (the maximum value of the interlayer distance) is the same as the maximum value (size) of the interlayer distance of the unattached area 91, preferably 0.5 μm or less, for example, 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm Any one of the following, 0.2 μm or less, and 0.1 μm or less.

未貼合區域92的大小(層間距離最大值)係例如成為對象的雙層組合不同之外,其餘均依照與上述未貼合區域91大小(層間距離最大值)的情況相同方法,便可求取。The size of the unattached area 92 (maximum distance between layers) is different from the target two-layer combination, for example, and the rest can be calculated in the same way as the size of the unattached area 91 (maximum distance between layers). take.

保護膜形成用複合片1A亦有完全未存在未貼合區域92的情形。本說明書中,當未貼合區域大小達0.05μm以上時,便認定有存在未貼合區域,但當完全沒有存在未貼合區域92時,會有將未貼合區域92的大小(層間距離)記為0μm的情況。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, there may be no unbonded area 92 at all. In this specification, when the size of the unattached area is greater than 0.05 μm, it is considered that there is an unattached area, but when there is no unattached area 92 at all, the size of the unattached area 92 (interlayer distance ) Case of 0 μm.

另一方面,如上述,可輕易降低黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度。所以,雖然保護膜形成用薄膜13的厚度Tp 並非固定,而是依照保護膜形成用薄膜13(黏著劑層12)的部位會有變動,但其變動幅度極小。On the other hand, as described above, the unevenness of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 can be easily reduced. Therefore, although the thickness T p of the thin film 13 for forming a protective film is not constant, but the position according to the thin film 13 for forming a protective film (adhesive layer 12) varies, but the range of variation is extremely small.

再者,如上述,因為可輕易降低黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度,因而保護膜形成用薄膜13臨黏著劑層12的一面(第2面)13b可輕易呈平滑、或降低凹凸度。所以,保護膜形成用薄膜13的外觀不易受損。 所以,即便由保護膜形成用薄膜13形成的保護膜,其臨黏著劑層12之一面(第2面)仍可呈平滑、或降低凹凸度,俾能輕易不致損及保護膜外觀。 依此,保護膜形成用複合片1A中,保護膜形成用薄膜13與保護膜均可成為設計性優異。Furthermore, as described above, since the unevenness of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 can be easily reduced, the surface 13b of the protective film forming film 13 on the adhesive layer 12 can be easily smoothed or reduced Roughness. Therefore, the appearance of the thin film 13 for forming a protective film is not easily damaged. Therefore, even if the protective film is formed by the thin film 13 for forming a protective film, the side (second side) of the adhesive layer 12 can be smoothed, or the unevenness can be reduced, so that the appearance of the protective film is not easily damaged. Accordingly, in the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, both the thin film 13 for forming a protective film and the protective film can be excellent in design.

保護膜形成用薄膜13的第2面13b,凸部最高部位與凹部最深部位間之最大高低差,較佳係在2μm以下,例如可為1.5μm以下及1μm以下中之任一者。此種保護膜形成用薄膜13與保護膜的設計性特優。The second surface 13b of the thin film 13 for forming a protective film, the maximum height difference between the highest part of the convex part and the deepest part of the concave part is preferably 2 μm or less, for example, any one of 1.5 μm or less and 1 μm or less. The thin film 13 for forming a protective film and the protective film are particularly excellent in design.

保護膜形成用薄膜13的第2面13b之上述最大高低差,係例如利用前所說明的方法,由保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片或保護膜形成用複合片自體形成截面,再使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),藉由觀察此截面便可求得。The above-mentioned maximum height difference of the second surface 13b of the thin film 13 for protective film formation is, for example, the cross-section of the test piece of the composite film for protective film formation or the composite film for protective film formation is formed by itself using the method described above, and then used Scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be obtained by observing this cross section.

此處雖舉保護膜形成用複合片1A為例,針對黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜進行說明,但關於保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等其他實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況,亦是同樣的黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜。Although the protective sheet forming composite sheet 1A is taken as an example here, the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film will be described, but regarding the protection of other embodiments such as the protective sheet forming composite sheet 1B and the protective film forming composite sheet 1C In the case of the composite sheet for film formation, the same is the same as the adhesive layer and the film for forming the protective film.

本發明的保護膜形成用複合片中,保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度(例如Tp )較佳係1~100μm、更佳係3~75μm、特佳係5~50μm。藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度達上述下限值以上,便可形成更高保護能力的保護膜。藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度在上述上限值以下,抑制厚度過厚。In the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention, the thickness (for example, T p ) of the film for forming a protective film is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 3 to 75 μm, and particularly preferably 5 to 50 μm. When the thickness of the thin film for forming a protective film exceeds the above lower limit value, a protective film with higher protective capacity can be formed. When the thickness of the thin film for forming a protective film is equal to or less than the above upper limit, the thickness is suppressed from being too thick.

當保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度會依保護膜形成用薄膜的部位而有所變動的情況,則保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度最小值可在上述下限值以上,且保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度最大值可在上述上限值以下。When the thickness of the thin film for protective film formation varies depending on the position of the thin film for protective film formation, the minimum thickness of the thin film for protective film formation may be above the lower limit, and the thickness of the thin film for protective film formation The maximum value may be below the above upper limit.

另外,所謂「保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度」,係指保護膜形成用薄膜全體的厚度,例如由複數層構成的保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度,係指構成保護膜形成用薄膜的所有層之合計厚度。In addition, the "thickness of the thin film for protective film formation" refers to the thickness of the entire thin film for protective film formation, for example, the thickness of the thin film for protective film formation consisting of a plurality of layers, refers to the thickness of all layers constituting the thin film for protective film formation Total thickness.

保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度係例如使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察保護膜形成用薄膜的側面或截面便可測定。 保護膜形成用薄膜的截面係例如依照與上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片截面的情況之同樣方法便可形成。The thickness of the thin film for protective film formation can be measured by observing the side surface or cross section of the thin film for protective film formation using, for example, a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross-section of the thin film for protective film formation can be formed in the same manner as in the case of the cross-section of the test piece of the support sheet and the composite sheet for protective film formation, for example.

例如利用前所說明的方法,從保護膜形成用複合片的複數個地方(例如5個地方)切取試驗片,針對此試驗片求取保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度最小值與最大值,再從這些數值求取這些最小值平均值與最大值平均值時,上述最小值平均值可達上述保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度下限值以上,且上述最大值平均值可在上述保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度上限值以下。For example, using the method described above, the test piece is cut from a plurality of places (for example, 5 places) of the composite film for forming a protective film, and the minimum and maximum thickness of the film for forming the protective film is obtained for this test piece, and then from When these minimum and maximum average values are obtained from these numerical values, the minimum average value can be equal to or greater than the lower limit of the thickness of the protective film forming film, and the maximum average value can be in the protective film forming film Below the upper limit of the thickness.

保護膜形成用薄膜係使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組成物便可形成。例如在保護膜形成用薄膜的形成標的面上塗佈保護膜形成用組成物,視需要施行乾燥,便可在目標部位處形成保護膜形成用薄膜。保護膜形成用組成物中在常溫不會氣化的成分間之含量比率,通常係同保護膜形成用薄膜的上述成分間之含量比率。The thin film for forming a protective film can be formed using a composition for forming a protective film containing its constituent material. For example, the protective film-forming composition is applied to the target-forming surface of the protective film-forming thin film, and if necessary, dried, the protective film-forming thin film can be formed at the target site. The content ratio between the components that do not vaporize at normal temperature in the composition for forming a protective film is usually the same as the content ratio between the above-mentioned components of the film for forming a protective film.

保護形成用組成物的塗佈係可利用公知方法實施,例如使用氣刀塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機、棒式塗佈機、凹版塗佈機、輥式塗佈機、輥式刀塗機、淋幕塗佈機、模塗機、刀塗機、網版塗佈機、麥勒棒塗機、吻合式塗佈機等各種塗佈機的方法。The coating system of the protective forming composition can be implemented by a known method, for example, using an air knife coater, a knife coater, a bar coater, a gravure coater, a roll coater, a roll knife coater , Curtain coater, die coater, knife coater, screen coater, Mailer bar coater, stapling coater and other coating methods.

保護膜形成用組成物的乾燥條件並無特別的限定,當保護膜形成用組成物含有後述溶劑的情況,以使其加熱乾燥為佳。而,含有溶劑的保護膜形成用組成物,是以以例如70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件施行乾燥為佳。但,當保護膜形成用組成物係熱硬化性的情況,則以以所形成保護膜形成用薄膜不會熱硬化的方式,使保護膜形成用組成物乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the composition for forming a protective film are not particularly limited, and when the composition for forming a protective film contains a solvent described later, it is preferably dried by heating. In addition, the composition for forming a protective film containing a solvent is preferably dried under conditions of, for example, 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes. However, when the composition for forming a protective film is thermosetting, it is preferable to dry the composition for forming a protective film so that the formed thin film for forming a protective film will not be thermally cured.

以下,針對保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜形成用組成物,依照種類別進行詳細說明。Hereinafter, the thin film for forming a protective film and the composition for forming a protective film will be described in detail according to types.

○熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 較佳熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,可列舉含有聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)者。 聚合體成分(A)係可視為由聚合性化合物進行聚合反應而形成的成分。 熱硬化性成分(B)係能以熱為反應的觸發,進行硬化(聚合)反應的成分。另外,本發明的聚合反應亦包括縮聚反應。○Thin film for thermosetting protective film formation Preferred films for forming a thermosetting protective film include those containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B). The polymer component (A) can be regarded as a component formed by a polymerization reaction of a polymerizable compound. The thermosetting component (B) is a component that can undergo a curing (polymerization) reaction using heat as a trigger for the reaction. In addition, the polymerization reaction of the present invention also includes polycondensation reaction.

將熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜貼附於半導體晶圓的背面之後,使熱硬化時的硬化條件,在硬化物成為充分發揮其機能程度的硬化度前提下,並無特別的限定,可配合熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的種類再行適當選擇。 例如熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的熱硬化時的加熱溫度,較佳係100~200℃、更佳係110~180℃、特佳係120~170℃。而,上述硬化時的加熱時間較佳係0.5~5小時、更佳係0.5~3小時、特佳係1~2小時。After attaching the film for forming a thermosetting protective film to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, the curing conditions at the time of thermosetting are not particularly limited as long as the cured product has a curing degree that fully exerts its function, and can be combined The type of the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film can be appropriately selected. For example, the heating temperature during thermosetting of the thermosetting protective film forming film is preferably 100 to 200°C, more preferably 110 to 180°C, and particularly preferably 120 to 170°C. In addition, the heating time during curing is preferably 0.5 to 5 hours, more preferably 0.5 to 3 hours, and particularly preferably 1 to 2 hours.

<熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)> 較佳熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物,可列舉例如:含有聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)(本說明書中亦簡稱「組成物(III-1)」)等。<Composition for forming thermosetting protective film (III-1)> A preferred composition for forming a thermosetting protective film includes, for example, a composition (III-1) for forming a thermosetting protective film containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B) (in this specification) Also referred to as "Composition (III-1)") etc.

[聚合體成分(A)] 聚合體成分(A)係供對熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等的成分。 組成物(III-1)與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的聚合體成分(A),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Polymer component (A)] The polymer component (A) is a component for imparting film-forming properties, flexibility, and the like to the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film. The composition (III-1) and the polymer component (A) contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination of The ratio is optional.

聚合體成分(A)係可舉例如:丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、苯氧樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺等,較佳係丙烯酸系樹脂。Examples of the polymer component (A) include acrylic resin, polyester, urethane resin, urethane acrylate resin, polysiloxane resin, rubber resin, phenoxy resin, thermosetting polymer Acetylene and the like are preferably acrylic resins.

聚合體成分(A)中的上述丙烯酸系樹脂,可列舉公知的丙烯酸聚合體。 丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳係10000~2000000、更佳係100000~1500000。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量達上述下限值以上,則提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的形狀安定性(保管時的經時安定性)。又,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量在上述上限值以下,則熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜會輕易追隨被黏物的凹凸面,更加抑制被黏物與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜間發生孔隙等。The acrylic resin in the polymer component (A) may be a known acrylic polymer. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic resin is preferably 10,000 to 2,000,000, and more preferably 100,000 to 1,500,000. When the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is at least the above lower limit, the shape stability of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film (time stability during storage) is improved. In addition, when the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is below the upper limit, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can easily follow the uneven surface of the adherend, thereby further suppressing the formation of the adherend and the thermosetting protective film Porosity occurs between the films.

本說明書中,所謂「重量平均分子量」在無特別聲明前提下,係指利用凝膠滲透色層分析儀(GPC)法所測定的聚苯乙烯換算值。In this specification, the "weight average molecular weight" refers to the conversion value of polystyrene measured by the gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method unless otherwise stated.

丙烯酸系樹脂的玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳係-60~70℃、更佳係-30~50℃。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg達上述下限值以上,抑制例如保護膜形成用薄膜之硬化物(即保護膜)與支撐片間之接著力,俾適度提升支撐片的剝離性。又,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg在上述上限值以下,則提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜的被黏物間之接著力。 另外,不僅侷限於丙烯酸系樹,本說明書中的樹脂Tg係例如使用微分掃描熱量計(DSC),將升溫速度或降溫速度設為10℃/min,使測定標的物溫度在-70℃至150℃間變化,藉由確認反曲點便可求得。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic resin is preferably -60 to 70°C, more preferably -30 to 50°C. When the Tg of the acrylic resin is equal to or higher than the above lower limit, for example, the adhesive force between the cured product of the protective film forming film (ie, the protective film) and the support sheet is suppressed, so that the peelability of the support sheet is appropriately improved. In addition, when the Tg of the acrylic resin is below the above upper limit, the adhesion between the thermosetting protective film forming film and the adherend of the protective film is improved. In addition, it is not limited to the acrylic tree. The resin Tg system in this specification uses, for example, a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), the heating rate or the cooling rate is set to 10°C/min, and the temperature of the measurement target is -70°C to 150°C. The change between ℃ can be obtained by confirming the inflection point.

丙烯酸系樹脂係可舉例如:1種或2種以上(甲基)丙烯酸酯的聚合體;從(甲基)丙烯酸、衣康酸、醋酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等之中選擇2種以上單體的共聚物等。Examples of acrylic resins include: polymers of one or more (meth)acrylates; from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene, and N-methylol Among acrylamide and the like, copolymers of two or more monomers are selected.

構成丙烯酸系樹脂的上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯,係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯)等,構成烷基酯的烷基係碳數1~18的鏈狀構造(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯氧基乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯氧基烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸醯亞胺; (甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等含環氧丙基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸-N-甲胺基乙酯等含取代胺基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。此處所謂「取代胺基」係指胺基的1個或2個氫原子,被氫原子以外之基取代而成的基。The (meth)acrylate constituting the acrylic resin may be, for example, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate Ester, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (A Group) hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid N-nonyl ester, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate) ), tridecyl (meth)acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Cetyl ester (palmityl (meth)acrylate), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc. The alkyl group of the base ester is a chain structure alkyl (meth)acrylate having 1 to 18 carbon atoms; Cycloalkyl (meth)acrylates such as isobornyl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate; Aryl (meth)acrylate such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyl (meth)acrylate such as (cyclopentenyl) (meth)acrylate; (Meth)acrylic acid cyclopentenyloxyalkyl esters such as dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate; (Meth)acrylic acid imide; (Meth)acrylic acid esters such as glycidyl acrylate (meth)acrylate; Hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Hydroxy-containing (meth)acrylates such as -2-hydroxybutyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid 3-hydroxybutyl ester, (meth)acrylic acid 4-hydroxybutyl ester; (Meth)acrylic acid-N-methylaminoethyl ester, etc. (meth)acrylic acid ester containing substituted amine groups, etc. Here, the "substituted amine group" refers to a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms of the amine group are substituted with groups other than hydrogen atoms.

丙烯酸系樹脂係例如除上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯之外,尚亦可由從(甲基)丙烯酸、衣康酸、醋酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等之中選擇1種或2種以上的單體,進行共聚合而成者。Acrylic resins can be selected from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene, N-hydroxymethylacrylamide, etc. One or more than two monomers are selected and copolymerized.

構成丙烯酸系樹脂的單體係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The single system constituting the acrylic resin may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

丙烯酸系樹脂亦可具有例如:乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等的能與其他化合物鍵結的官能基。丙烯酸系樹脂的上述官能基係可經由後述交聯劑(F)而與其他化合物鍵結,亦可在未經由交聯劑(F)情況下直接鍵結於其他化合物。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂利用上述官能基而與其他化合物鍵結,便具有提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得封裝之可靠度的傾向。The acrylic resin may have functional groups capable of bonding with other compounds, such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups. The above-mentioned functional group system of the acrylic resin may be bonded to other compounds via a cross-linking agent (F) described later, or may be directly bonded to other compounds without the cross-linking agent (F). By bonding the acrylic resin to other compounds by using the above functional groups, there is a tendency to increase the reliability of the encapsulation obtained by using the composite sheet for forming a protective film.

本發明中,聚合體成分(A)係可未使用丙烯酸系樹脂情況下,單獨使用丙烯酸系樹脂以外的熱可塑性樹脂(以下亦簡稱「熱可塑性樹脂」),亦可併用丙烯酸系樹脂。藉由使用上述熱可塑性樹脂,則提升保護膜從支撐片的剝離性、使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜輕易追隨被黏物的凹凸面等,有時會更加抑制被黏物與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜間發生孔隙等。In the present invention, in the case where the acrylic resin is not used for the polymer component (A), thermoplastic resins other than acrylic resins (hereinafter also simply referred to as "thermoplastic resins") may be used alone, or acrylic resins may be used in combination. By using the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet is improved, and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film easily follows the uneven surface of the adherend, etc., and the adherend and thermosetting property may be more suppressed Porosity or the like occurs between the thin films for protective film formation.

上述熱可塑性樹脂的重量平均分子量較佳係1000~100000、更佳係3000~80000。The weight average molecular weight of the thermoplastic resin is preferably 1,000 to 100,000, and more preferably 3,000 to 80,000.

上述熱可塑性樹脂的玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳係-30~150℃、更佳係-20~120℃。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the thermoplastic resin is preferably -30 to 150°C, more preferably -20 to 120°C.

上述熱可塑性樹脂,可舉例如:聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等。Examples of the thermoplastic resin include polyester, polyurethane, phenoxy resin, polybutene, polybutadiene, and polystyrene.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述熱可塑性樹脂,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system Can be chosen arbitrarily.

組成物(III-1)中,聚合體成分(A)含量相對於溶劑除外所有成分總含量的比例(即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的聚合體成分(A)含量),不管聚合體成分(A)的種類,均較佳係5~85質量%、更佳係5~75質量%,例如可為5~65質量%、5~50質量%、及10~35質量%等中之任一者。In the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the polymer component (A) to the total content of all components except the solvent (that is, the content of the polymer component (A) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film), regardless of the polymer The types of component (A) are preferably 5 to 85% by mass, more preferably 5 to 75% by mass, for example, 5 to 65% by mass, 5 to 50% by mass, and 10 to 35% by mass, etc. Any one.

聚合體成分(A)會有亦屬於熱硬化性成分(B)的情況。本發明中,當組成物(III-1)係含有此種隸屬於聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)雙方的成分時,便視同組成物(III-1)係含有聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)。The polymer component (A) may also belong to the thermosetting component (B). In the present invention, when the composition (III-1) contains such a component that belongs to both the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B), it is deemed that the composition (III-1) contains polymerization Body composition (A) and thermosetting composition (B).

[熱硬化性成分(B)] 熱硬化性成分(B)係供使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜硬化用的成分。 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的熱硬化性成分(B),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Thermosetting component (B)] The thermosetting component (B) is a component for curing the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film. The composition (III-1) and the thermosetting component (B) contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or two or more types, and if two or more types are used, the combination The ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

熱硬化性成分(B)係可舉例如:環氧系熱硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺、聚氨酯、不飽和聚酯、聚矽氧樹脂等,較佳係環氧系熱硬化性樹脂。Examples of the thermosetting component (B) include epoxy thermosetting resin, thermosetting polyimide, polyurethane, unsaturated polyester, polysiloxane resin, etc., preferably epoxy thermosetting resin Resin.

(環氧系熱硬化性樹脂) 環氧系熱硬化性樹脂係由環氧樹脂(B1)與熱硬化劑(B2)構成。 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的環氧系熱硬化性樹脂,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。(Epoxy thermosetting resin) The epoxy-based thermosetting resin system is composed of an epoxy resin (B1) and a thermosetting agent (B2). The composition (III-1) and the thermosetting epoxy resin contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or two or more types, and if two or more types are used, the combination The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

‧環氧樹脂(B1) 環氧樹脂(B1)可列舉公知物,例如:多官能基系環氧樹脂、聯苯化合物、雙酚A二環氧丙醚及其氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛清漆環氧樹脂、二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂、聯苯型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、伸苯骨架型環氧樹脂等雙官能基以上的環氧化合物。‧Epoxy resin (B1) Examples of the epoxy resin (B1) include publicly known substances, such as polyfunctional epoxy resins, biphenyl compounds, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether and its hydrogenated products, o-cresol novolac epoxy resins, dicyclopentane Diene-type epoxy resins, biphenyl-type epoxy resins, bisphenol A-type epoxy resins, bisphenol F-type epoxy resins, phenylene skeleton-type epoxy resins and other epoxy functional compounds with more than two functional groups.

環氧樹脂(B1)亦可使用具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂。具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂之與丙烯酸系樹脂間之相溶性,較高於與未具不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂間之相溶性。所以,藉由使用具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂,便可提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片的可靠度。As the epoxy resin (B1), an epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group can also be used. The compatibility of epoxy resins with unsaturated hydrocarbon groups with acrylic resins is higher than that with epoxy resins without unsaturated hydrocarbon groups. Therefore, by using an epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film can be improved.

具不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂係可列舉例如多官能基系環氧樹脂的部分環氧基,被轉換為具不飽和烴基之基而形成的化合物。此種化合物係例如藉由使(甲基)丙烯酸或其衍生物,對環氧基進行加成反應便可獲得。 再者,具不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂係可列舉例如在構成環氧樹脂的芳香環等,直接鍵結著具不飽和烴基之基的化合物等。 不飽和烴基係具有聚合性的不飽和基,具體例係可舉例如:乙烯基(ethenyl group)、2-丙烯基(烯丙基)、(甲基)丙烯醯基、(甲基)丙烯醯胺基等,較佳係丙烯醯基。Examples of the epoxy resin system having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include a compound formed by converting a partial epoxy group of a polyfunctional epoxy resin into a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. Such a compound can be obtained, for example, by adding (meth)acrylic acid or a derivative thereof to an epoxy group. In addition, examples of the epoxy resin group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include a compound having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group directly bonded to an aromatic ring constituting the epoxy resin. The unsaturated hydrocarbon group has a polymerizable unsaturated group, and specific examples include, for example, vinyl (ethenyl group), 2-propenyl (allyl), (meth)acryloyl, (meth)acryloyl The amine group and the like are preferably acrylamide.

環氧樹脂(B1)的數量平均分子量並無特別的限定,就從熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化性、以及硬化後的保護膜強度與耐熱性觀點,較佳係300~30000、更佳係300~10000、特佳係300~3000。The number average molecular weight of the epoxy resin (B1) is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of the curability of the thermosetting protective film forming film and the strength and heat resistance of the protective film after curing, it is preferably 300 to 30,000. The best series is 300~10000, and the best series is 300~3000.

本說明書中,所謂「數量平均分子量」在無特別聲明前提下,係指利用凝膠滲透色層分析儀(GPC)法所測定的聚苯乙烯換算值。In this specification, the "number-average molecular weight" refers to the conversion value of polystyrene measured by the gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method unless otherwise stated.

環氧樹脂(B1)的環氧當量較佳係100~1000g/eq、更佳係150~ 950g/eq。 本說明書中,所謂「環氧當量」係指含有1克當量環氧基的環氧化合物克數(g/eq),可根據JIS K 7236:2001的方法進行測定。The epoxy equivalent of the epoxy resin (B1) is preferably 100 to 1000 g/eq, more preferably 150 to 950 g/eq. In this specification, the "epoxy equivalent" refers to the gram number (g/eq) of an epoxy compound containing 1 gram equivalent of epoxy groups, and can be measured according to the method of JIS K 7236:2001.

環氧樹脂(B1)係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若併用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。One type of epoxy resin (B1) may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. If two or more types are used in combination, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

‧熱硬化劑(B2) 熱硬化劑(B2)係對環氧樹脂(B1)具有硬化劑的機能。 熱硬化劑(B2)可列舉1分子中具有2個以上能與環氧基產生反應之官能基的化合物。上述官能基係可舉例如:酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基、以及由酸基經酸酐化的基等,較佳係酚性羥基、胺基、或由酸基經酸酐化的基,更佳係酚性羥基或胺基。‧Heat hardener (B2) The thermosetting agent (B2) has the function of a curing agent for the epoxy resin (B1). The thermosetting agent (B2) includes compounds having two or more functional groups capable of reacting with epoxy groups in one molecule. Examples of the functional group system include phenolic hydroxyl groups, alcoholic hydroxyl groups, amine groups, carboxyl groups, and acidified groups with acid groups, and preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups, amine groups, or acidified groups with acid groups. It is more preferably a phenolic hydroxyl group or an amine group.

熱硬化劑(B2)中,具有酚性羥基的酚系硬化劑係可舉例如:多官能基酚樹脂、聯苯、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、芳烷基型酚樹脂等。 熱硬化劑(B2)中,具有胺基的胺系硬化劑可列舉例如:二氰二胺等。Among the thermosetting agents (B2), examples of the phenolic curing agent system having a phenolic hydroxyl group include polyfunctional phenol resin, biphenyl, novolac type phenol resin, dicyclopentadiene type phenol resin, and aralkyl type Phenol resin etc. Among the thermosetting agents (B2), examples of the amine-based curing agent having an amine group include dicyandiamide and the like.

熱硬化劑(B2)亦可具有不飽和烴基。 具不飽和烴基的熱硬化劑(B2)係可舉例如:酚樹脂的部分羥基被具不飽和烴基的基所取代之化合物,以及在酚樹脂的芳香環直接鍵結具不飽和烴基之基而形成的化合物等。 熱硬化劑(B2)中的上述不飽和烴基,係與上述具不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂中的不飽和烴基為同樣者。The thermal hardener (B2) may have an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. The thermosetting agent (B2) having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group includes, for example, a compound in which a part of hydroxyl groups of a phenol resin is replaced by a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, and a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group is directly bonded to the aromatic ring of the phenol resin Compounds formed, etc. The unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the thermosetting agent (B2) is the same as the unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group.

當熱硬化劑(B2)係使用酚系硬化劑的情況,就從提升保護膜從支撐片的剝離性觀點,熱硬化劑(B2)較佳係軟化點或玻璃轉移溫度較高者。When the phenolic hardener is used as the thermosetting agent (B2), from the viewpoint of improving the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet, the thermosetting agent (B2) is preferably one having a higher softening point or glass transition temperature.

熱硬化劑(B2)中,例如多官能基酚樹脂、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、芳烷基型酚樹脂等樹脂成分的數量平均分子量,較佳係300~30000、更佳係400~10000、特佳係500~3000。 熱硬化劑(B2)中,例如聯苯、二氰二胺等非樹脂成分的分子量並無特別的限定,較佳係例如60~500。In the thermosetting agent (B2), for example, the number average molecular weight of resin components such as polyfunctional phenol resin, novolac type phenol resin, dicyclopentadiene type phenol resin, and aralkyl type phenol resin is preferably 300 to 30,000 , 400~10000 better, 500~3000 especially good. In the thermosetting agent (B2), the molecular weights of non-resin components such as biphenyl and dicyandiamide are not particularly limited, but are preferably 60 to 500, for example.

熱硬化劑(B2)係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若併用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The thermosetting agent (B2) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. If two or more are used in combination, the combination and ratio may be arbitrarily selected.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,熱硬化劑(B2)的含量相對於環氧樹脂(B1)的含量100質量份,較佳係0.1~500質量份、更佳係1~200質量份,亦可例如1~100質量份、1~50質量份、1~25質量份、及1~10質量份等中之任一者。藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的上述含量達上述下限值以上,使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化更容易進行。又,藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的上述含量在上述上限值以下,降低熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的吸濕率,更加提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得封裝的可靠度。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) relative to the content of the epoxy resin (B1) is 100 parts by mass, preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass, more It is preferably 1 to 200 parts by mass, for example, any one of 1 to 100 parts by mass, 1 to 50 parts by mass, 1 to 25 parts by mass, and 1 to 10 parts by mass. When the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) reaches the above lower limit or more, the thermosetting protective film forming film is more easily cured. In addition, when the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is below the upper limit, the moisture absorption rate of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is reduced, and the reliability of packaging obtained by using the composite sheet for forming a protective film is further improved.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,熱硬化性成分(B)的含量(例如環氧樹脂(B1)與熱硬化劑(B2)的總含量)相對於聚合體成分(A)含有量100質量份,較佳係20~500質量份、更佳係30~300質量份、特佳係40~150質量份,可例如45~100質量份、及50~80質量份等中之任一者。藉由熱硬化性成分(B)的上述含量在此種範圍內,例如抑制保護膜形成用薄膜之硬化物與支撐片間之接著力,提升支撐片的剝離性。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting component (B) (for example, the total content of the epoxy resin (B1) and the thermosetting agent (B2)) relative to the polymer The content of component (A) is 100 parts by mass, preferably 20 to 500 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 300 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 40 to 150 parts by mass, such as 45 to 100 parts by mass, and 50 to 80 parts by mass Any of the shares. When the content of the thermosetting component (B) is within this range, for example, the adhesive force between the cured product of the protective film forming film and the support sheet is suppressed, and the peelability of the support sheet is improved.

[硬化促進劑(C)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有硬化促進劑(C)。硬化促進劑(C)係供調整組成物(III-1)之硬化速度的成分。 較佳硬化促進劑(C)係可舉例如:三伸乙二胺、苄基二甲胺、三乙醇胺、二甲胺基乙醇、參(二甲胺基甲基)酚等的三級胺;2-甲基咪唑、2-苯基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑等咪唑類(1個以上氫原子被氫原子以外的基所取代之咪唑);三丁膦、二苯膦、三苯膦等有機膦類(1個以上氫原子被有機基所取代的膦);四苯鏻四苯基硼酸鹽、三苯膦四苯基硼酸鹽等四苯硼酸鹽等。[Hardening accelerator (C)] The composition (III-1) and the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a curing accelerator (C). The curing accelerator (C) is a component for adjusting the curing speed of the composition (III-1). Preferred hardening accelerators (C) include tertiary amines such as triethylenediamine, benzyldimethylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, ginseng (dimethylaminomethyl)phenol; 2-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4,5-dihydroxymethylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5- Imidazoles such as hydroxymethylimidazole (imidazoles with one or more hydrogen atoms replaced by groups other than hydrogen atoms); organic phosphines such as tributylphosphine, diphenylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine (one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by organic groups) Substituted phosphines); tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenylborate, triphenylphosphine tetraphenylborate and other tetraphenylborate.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的硬化促進劑(C),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The composition (III-1) and the curing accelerator (C) contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination of The ratio is optional.

當使用硬化促進劑(C)的情況,在組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,硬化促進劑(C)含量相對於熱硬化性成分(B)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~10質量份、更佳係0.1~7質量份。藉由硬化促進劑(C)的上述含量達上述下限值以上,便可使由使用硬化促進劑(C)所造成的效果更加明顯。又,藉由硬化促進劑(C)的含量在上述上限值以下,則例如提高抑制高極性硬化促進劑(C)在高溫‧高濕度條件下,於熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中偏析朝與被黏物間之接著界面移動的效果,更加提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片的可靠度。When the hardening accelerator (C) is used, in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the hardening accelerator (C) is 100 parts by mass relative to the content of the thermosetting component (B) It is preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.1 to 7 parts by mass. When the above content of the hardening accelerator (C) reaches the above lower limit value, the effect caused by the use of the hardening accelerator (C) can be made more obvious. In addition, when the content of the hardening accelerator (C) is below the upper limit, for example, the suppression of segregation of the high-polarity hardening accelerator (C) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film under high temperature and high humidity conditions The effect of moving toward the next interface with the adherend further enhances the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film.

[填充材(D)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有填充材(D)。熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜藉由含有填充材(D),可更輕易將上述吸水率與黏著力變化率調整於目標範圍內。又,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜藉由含有填充材(D),可更輕易地調節熱膨脹係數,藉由將此熱膨脹係數對熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜的形成標的物呈最佳化,便更加提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片的可靠度。又,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜藉由含有填充材(D),亦可降低保護膜的吸濕率、提升散熱性等。[Filling material (D)] The composition (III-1) and the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a filler (D). The thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film contains the filler (D), so that the water absorption rate and the change rate of the adhesive force can be more easily adjusted within the target range. In addition, by containing the filler (D), the film for thermosetting protective film formation and the protective film can more easily adjust the coefficient of thermal expansion. By using this coefficient of thermal expansion for the formation of the film for thermosetting protective film or the formation of the protective film The optimization of the target object further enhances the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained by using the composite film for forming a protective film. In addition, the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film can also reduce the moisture absorption rate of the protective film and improve heat dissipation by containing the filler (D).

填充材(D)係有機填充材與無機填充材任一者均可,較佳係無機填充材。 較佳無機填充材係可舉例如:二氧化矽、氧化鋁、滑石、碳酸鈣、鈦白、氧化鐵紅、碳化矽、氮化硼等粉末;將這些無機填充材球形化後的球珠;這些無機填充材的表面改質物;這些無機填充材的單結晶纖維;玻璃纖維等。 這些之中,無機填充材較佳係二氧化矽或氧化鋁、更佳係二氧化矽。The filler (D) may be either an organic filler or an inorganic filler, and is preferably an inorganic filler. Preferred inorganic filler materials include, for example, silica, alumina, talc, calcium carbonate, titanium white, iron oxide red, silicon carbide, boron nitride and other powders; spheres obtained by spheroidizing these inorganic filler materials; Surface modification of these inorganic fillers; single crystal fibers of these inorganic fillers; glass fibers, etc. Among these, the inorganic filler is preferably silica or alumina, and more preferably silica.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的填充材(D),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The composition (III-1) and the filler (D) contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination and ratio The department can be chosen arbitrarily.

當使用填充材(D)的情況,組成物(III-1)中,填充材(D)含量相對於溶劑以外所有成分總含量的比例(即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的填充材(D)含量),較佳係5~80質量%、更佳係10~70質量%,例如可為20~65質量%、30~65質量%及40~65質量%等中之任一者。藉由填充材(D)含量在此種範圍內,便更輕易調整上述熱膨脹係數,且更加提升保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜的強度。When the filler (D) is used, in the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the filler (D) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the filler of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film ( D) Content), preferably 5 to 80 mass%, more preferably 10 to 70 mass%, for example, any one of 20 to 65 mass%, 30 to 65 mass%, 40 to 65 mass%, etc. When the content of the filler (D) is within this range, the above-mentioned thermal expansion coefficient can be adjusted more easily, and the strength of the protective film forming film and the protective film can be further improved.

[偶合劑(E)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有偶合劑(E)。偶合劑(E)係藉由使用具有能與無機化合物或有機化合物產生反應之官能基者,便可提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜對被黏物的接著性與密接性。又,藉由使用偶合劑(E),熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化物(保護膜)便在不會損及耐熱性情況下,提升耐水性。[Coupling agent (E)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a coupling agent (E). The coupling agent (E) can improve the adhesion and adhesion of the thermosetting protective film-forming film to the adherend by using a functional group capable of reacting with an inorganic compound or an organic compound. Furthermore, by using the coupling agent (E), the cured product (protective film) of the thermosetting protective film forming film improves the water resistance without impairing the heat resistance.

偶合劑(E)較佳係具有能與聚合體成分(A)、熱硬化性成分(B)等所具有官能基產生反應之官能基的化合物,更佳係矽烷偶合劑。 較佳的上述矽烷偶合劑係可舉例如:3-環氧丙氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、2-(3,4-環氧環己基)乙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-(苯基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-苯胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-脲丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-巰丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-巰丙基甲基二甲氧基矽烷、雙(3-三乙氧基矽烷丙基)四磺胺、甲基三甲氧基矽烷、甲基三乙氧基矽烷、乙烯三甲氧基矽烷、乙烯三乙醯氧基矽烷、咪唑矽烷等。The coupling agent (E) is preferably a compound having a functional group capable of reacting with a functional group possessed by the polymer component (A), thermosetting component (B), etc., and more preferably a silane coupling agent. Examples of the preferred silane coupling agent include 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyl Propyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxymethyldiethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxy Propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyl Methyldiethoxysilane, 3-(phenylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-anilinopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-ureapropyltriethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropyl Trimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis(3-triethoxysilylpropyl)tetrasulfonamide, methyltrimethoxysilane, methyltriethoxysilane, ethylene Trimethoxysilane, ethylene triethoxysilane, imidazole silane, etc.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的偶合劑(E),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The coupling agent (E) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination and ratio The department can be chosen arbitrarily.

使用偶合劑(E)的情況,組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,偶合劑(E)的含量,相對於聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)的總含量100質量份,較佳係0.03~20質量份、更佳係0.05~10質量份、特佳係0.1~5質量份。藉由偶合劑(E)的上述含量達上述下限值以上,便提升填充材(D)對樹脂的分散性、提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜與被黏物間之接著性等,可使由使用偶合劑(E)造成的效果更加明顯。又,藉由偶合劑(E)的上述含量在上述上限值以下,更加抑制發生逸氣情形。When the coupling agent (E) is used, the content of the coupling agent (E) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is relative to the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B ) The total content is 100 parts by mass, preferably 0.03-20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.05-10 parts by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1-5 parts by mass. When the content of the coupling agent (E) exceeds the above lower limit, the dispersibility of the filler (D) to the resin and the adhesion between the thermosetting protective film forming film and the adherend can be improved. Make the effect caused by the use of coupling agent (E) more obvious. In addition, when the content of the coupling agent (E) is below the upper limit, the occurrence of outgassing is further suppressed.

[交聯劑(F)] 當聚合體成分(A)係使用上述丙烯酸系樹脂等具有能與其他化合物鍵結之乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等官能基者的情況,組成物(III-1)與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有交聯劑(F)。交聯劑(F)係供使聚合體成分(A)中的上述官能基與其他化合物鍵結進行交聯用的成分,藉由依此進行交聯,便可調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的初期接著力與凝聚力。[Crosslinking agent (F)] When the polymer component (A) uses the above-mentioned acrylic resins and the like, it has functional groups such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryloyl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups that can bond with other compounds. The film for forming the substance (III-1) and the thermosetting protective film may contain a crosslinking agent (F). The cross-linking agent (F) is a component for cross-linking the above functional groups in the polymer component (A) with other compounds, and by cross-linking in this way, the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can be adjusted The initial adhesion and cohesion.

交聯劑(F)係可舉例如:有機多元異氰酸酯化合物、有機多元亞胺化合物、金屬螯合系交聯劑(具金屬螯合構造的交聯劑)、氮丙啶系交聯劑(具吖丙啶基的交聯劑)等。Examples of the crosslinking agent (F) system include organic polyisocyanate compounds, organic polyimide compounds, metal chelate crosslinkers (crosslinkers with metal chelate structure), and aziridine crosslinkers (with Aziridine-based cross-linking agent), etc.

上述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物係可舉例如:芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物及脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物(以下將這些化合物統稱為「芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等」);上述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等的三聚體、異三聚氰酸酯體及加成體;由上述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等與多元醇化合物進行反應獲得的末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚物等。上述「加成體」係指由上述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物或脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物,與乙二醇、丙二醇、新戊二醇、三羥甲基丙烷或蓖麻油等含低分子活性氫化合物的反應產物。上述加成體之例係可列舉如後述的三羥甲基丙烷之二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯加成物等。又,所謂「末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚物」係如前所說明。Examples of the organic polyisocyanate compound include aromatic polyisocyanate compounds, aliphatic polyisocyanate compounds, and alicyclic polyisocyanate compounds (hereinafter these compounds are collectively referred to as "aromatic polyisocyanate compounds, etc."); and the aforementioned aromatic polyisocyanate compounds Compounds such as trimers, isocyanurates, and adducts; terminal isocyanate urethane prepolymers obtained by reacting the above-mentioned aromatic polyisocyanate compounds with polyol compounds, etc. The above-mentioned "adduct" means the above-mentioned aromatic polyisocyanate compound, aliphatic polyisocyanate compound or alicyclic polyisocyanate compound, together with ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, trimethylolpropane or castor oil, etc. Reaction products containing low molecular active hydrogen compounds. Examples of the above-mentioned adducts include the adducts of trimethylolpropane dixylylene diisocyanate as described below. In addition, the "terminal isocyanate urethane prepolymer" is as explained above.

上述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物更具體係可舉例如:2,4-二異氰酸甲苯酯;2,6-二異氰酸甲苯酯;1,3-二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯;1,4-二甲苯二異氰酸酯;二苯甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯;二苯甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯;3-甲基二苯甲烷二異氰酸酯;六亞甲基二異氰酸酯;異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-4,4’-二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-2,4’-二異氰酸酯;在三羥甲基丙烷等的多元醇之所有或部分羥基,加成二異氰酸甲苯酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯及二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯中之任1種或2種以上的化合物;離胺酸二異氰酸酯等。The above-mentioned organic polyisocyanate compounds can be more systematically exemplified by: 2,4-toluene diisocyanate; 2,6-toluene diisocyanate; 1,3-diisocyanatoxylylene; 1, 4-xylene diisocyanate; diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; diphenylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; 3-methyldiphenylmethane diisocyanate; hexamethylene diisocyanate; isophor Ketone diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; in all or part of the hydroxyl groups of polyhydric alcohols such as trimethylolpropane, add two Toluene isocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate and any one or more than two compounds of diphenyl isocyanate; diamine diisocyanate, etc.

上述有機多元亞胺化合物係可舉例如:N,N’-二苯甲烷-4,4’-雙(1-氮丙啶羧醯胺)、三羥甲基丙烷-三-β-吖丙啶基丙酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷-三-β-吖丙啶基丙酸酯、N,N’-甲苯-2,4-雙(1-氮丙啶羧醯胺)三伸乙基三聚氰胺等。Examples of the organic polyimine compound system include N,N'-diphenylmethane-4,4'-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide), trimethylolpropane-tri-β-aziridine Propionate, tetramethylolmethane-tri-β-aziridinyl propionate, N,N'-toluene-2,4-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide) triethylidene melamine Wait.

當交聯劑(F)係使用有機多元異氰酸酯化合物的情況,聚合體成分(A)較佳係使用含羥基聚合體。當交聯劑(F)具有異氰酸酯基,且聚合體成分(A)具有羥基的情況,藉由交聯劑(F)與聚合體成分(A)的反應,便可簡便地在熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中導入交聯構造。When the organic polyisocyanate compound is used as the crosslinking agent (F), the polymer component (A) preferably uses a hydroxyl group-containing polymer. When the crosslinking agent (F) has an isocyanate group and the polymer component (A) has a hydroxyl group, the thermosetting property can be easily protected by the reaction of the crosslinking agent (F) and the polymer component (A) A cross-linked structure is introduced into the film for film formation.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的交聯劑(F),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The composition (III-1) and the cross-linking agent (F) contained in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination of The ratio is optional.

當使用交聯劑(F)的情況,組成物(III-1)中的交聯劑(F)含量,相對於聚合體成分(A)含量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.1~10質量份、特佳係0.5~5質量份。藉由交聯劑(F)的上述含量達上述下限值以上,便可使由使用交聯劑(F)所造成效果更加明顯。又,藉由交聯劑(F)的上述含量在上述上限值以下,便可抑制交聯劑(F)過度使用。When the crosslinking agent (F) is used, the content of the crosslinking agent (F) in the composition (III-1) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the polymer component (A). More preferably, it is 0.1 to 10 parts by mass, and especially good is 0.5 to 5 parts by mass. When the above content of the crosslinking agent (F) reaches the above lower limit value, the effect caused by the use of the crosslinking agent (F) can be made more obvious. In addition, when the content of the cross-linking agent (F) is equal to or less than the upper limit value, excessive use of the cross-linking agent (F) can be suppressed.

[能量線硬化性樹脂(G)] 組成物(III-1)亦可含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)。藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G),便可利用能量線照射使特性變化。[Energy Ray Curable Resin (G)] The composition (III-1) may contain an energy ray-curable resin (G). When the film for forming a thermosetting protective film contains an energy ray-curable resin (G), the characteristics can be changed by energy ray irradiation.

能量線硬化性樹脂(G)係由能量線硬化性化合物進行聚合(硬化)而獲得。 上述能量線硬化性化合物可列舉1分子內具有至少1個聚合性雙鍵的化合物,較佳係具(甲基)丙烯醯基的丙烯酸酯系化合物。The energy ray-curable resin (G) is obtained by polymerizing (curing) an energy ray-curable compound. Examples of the energy ray-curable compound include compounds having at least one polymerizable double bond in one molecule, and preferably an acrylate compound having a (meth)acryloyl group.

上述丙烯酸酯系化合物係可舉例如:三羥甲基丙烷三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、四羥甲基甲烷四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇單羥五[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇六[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,4-丁二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,6-己二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]等含鏈狀脂肪族骨架之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;二(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等含環狀脂肪族骨架之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]等聚烷二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯;寡聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物;環氧改質(甲基)丙烯酸酯;上述聚烷二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯以外的聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;衣康酸寡聚物等。Examples of the acrylate compound system include trimethylolpropane tri[(meth)acrylate], tetramethylolmethane tetra[(meth)acrylate], and neopentyl tetraol[(methyl) Acrylate], neopentaerythritol tetra[(meth)acrylate], dipentaerythritol monohydroxypenta[(meth)acrylate], dipentaerythritol hexa[(meth)acrylate], 1,4-butanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,6-hexanediol di[(meth)acrylate] and other (meth)acrylates containing chain aliphatic skeleton; di( (Meth)acrylates containing cyclic aliphatic skeleton such as dicyclopentyl methacrylate; polyalkylene glycol (meth)acrylates such as polyethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate]; oligomerization Ester (meth)acrylate; urethane (meth)acrylate oligomer; epoxy modified (meth)acrylate; polyether (meth)acrylate other than the above polyalkylene glycol (meth)acrylate Base) acrylate; itaconic acid oligomer, etc.

上述能量線硬化性化合物的重量平均分子量較佳係100~30000、更佳係300~10000。The weight average molecular weight of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 100 to 30,000, and more preferably 300 to 10,000.

聚合時所使用的上述能量線硬化性化合物,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above energy ray-curable compound used in the polymerization may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

組成物(III-1)所含有的能量線硬化性樹脂(G)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The energy ray-curable resin (G) system contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

使用能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的情況,能量線硬化性樹脂(G)含量相對於組成物(III-1)中溶劑以外所有成分總含量,較佳係1~95質量%、更佳係5~90質量%、特佳係10~85質量%。When using the energy ray-curable resin (G), the content of the energy ray-curable resin (G) is preferably 1 to 95% by mass relative to the total content of all components except the solvent in the composition (III-1), and more preferably 5~90% by mass, 10~85% by mass of the Tejia series.

[光聚合起始劑(H)] 當組成物(III-1)係含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的情況,為能有效率地進行能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的聚合反應,亦可含有光聚合起始劑(H)。[Photopolymerization initiator (H)] When the composition (III-1) contains an energy ray-curable resin (G), in order to efficiently perform the polymerization reaction of the energy ray-curable resin (G), a photopolymerization initiator (H) may be included .

組成物(III-1)中的光聚合起始劑(H)係可舉例如:苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻安息香酸、苯偶姻安息香酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲縮酮等苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮等苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦等醯化氧化膦化合物;苄基苯硫醚、單硫化四甲胺硫甲醯等硫醚化合物;1-羥環己基苯酮等α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等二茂鈦化合物;氧硫𠮿

Figure 02_image001
等氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
化合物;過氧化合物;二乙醯等二酮化合物;苄基;二苄基;二苯基酮;2,4-二乙基氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
;1,2-二苯甲烷;2-羥-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。 再者,上述光聚合起始劑尚可舉例如:1-氯蒽醌等醌化合物;胺等光增感劑等。Examples of the photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) include benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, and benzoin isobutyl ether , Benzoin benzoin acid, benzoin benzoin methyl ester, benzoin dimethyl ketal and other benzoin compounds; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1- Acetophenone compounds such as ketones, 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenylphosphine oxide , 2,4,6-Trimethylbenzyl diphenylphosphine oxide and other sulfonated phosphine oxide compounds; benzyl phenyl sulfide, tetramethylamine thiosulfide monosulfide and other sulfide compounds; 1-hydroxycyclohexyl Α-keto alcohol compounds such as benzophenone; azo compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; oxysulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
Isotope sulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
Compounds; Peroxy compounds; Diketones such as diethyl acetyl; benzyl; dibenzyl; diphenyl ketone; 2,4-diethyl oxysulfide
Figure 02_image001
; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone and so on. In addition, the photopolymerization initiator may include, for example, quinone compounds such as 1-chloroanthraquinone; light sensitizers such as amine.

組成物(III-1)所含有的光聚合起始劑(H)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator (H) contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

當使用光聚合起始劑(H)的情況,組成物(III-1)中的光聚合起始劑(H)含量,相對於能量線硬化性樹脂(G)含量100質量份,較佳係0.1~20質量份、更佳係1~10質量份、特佳係2~5質量份。When the photopolymerization initiator (H) is used, the content of the photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) is preferably 100 parts by mass relative to the energy ray curable resin (G) content. 0.1 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 1 to 10 parts by mass, and particularly good 2 to 5 parts by mass.

[著色劑(I)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有著色劑(I)。 著色劑(I)係可舉例如:無機系顏料、有機系顏料、有機系染料等公知物。[Colorant (I)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a colorant (I). Examples of the colorant (I) series include known substances such as inorganic pigments, organic pigments, and organic dyes.

上述有機系顏料及有機系染料係可舉例如:銨(aminium)系色素、花青(cyanine)系色素、部花青素(merocyanine)系色素、克酮酸(croconium)系色素、方酸菁(squarylium)系色素、甘菊環鎓(azulenium)系色素、聚次甲基(polymethine)系色素、萘醌(naphthoquinone)系色素、吡喃(pyrylium)系色素、酞青素(phthalocyanine)系色素、萘酞菁(naphthalocyanine)系色素、萘內醯亞胺(naphtholactam)系色素、偶氮(azo)系色素、縮合偶氮系色素、靛藍(indigo)系色素、芘酮(perinone)系色素、苝(Perylene)系色素、雙噁嗪(dioxazine)系色素、喹吖酮(quinacridone)系色素、異吲哚啉酮(isoindolinone)系色素、喹啉黃(quinophthalone)系色素、吡咯(pyrrole)系色素、硫靛藍(thioindigo)系色素、金屬錯合物系色素(金屬錯鹽染料)、二硫酚(dithiol)金屬錯合物系色素、吲哚酚(indole phenol)系色素、三烯丙基甲烷(triallyl methane)系色素、蒽醌(anthraquinone)系色素、雙噁嗪系色素、萘酚(naphthol)系色素、甲亞胺(azomethine)系色素、苯并咪唑酮(benzimidazolone)系色素、皮蒽酮(pyranthrone)系色素及士林(threne)系色素等。Examples of the organic pigments and organic dyes include ammonium pigments, cyanine pigments, merocyanine pigments, croconium pigments, and squaryl cyanine. (Squarylium) pigment, azulenium pigment, polymethine pigment, naphthoquinone pigment, pyrylium pigment, phthalocyanine pigment, naphthalene Naphthalocyanine pigments, naphtholactam pigments, azo pigments, condensed azo pigments, indigo pigments, perinone pigments, perylene ( Perylene pigments, dioxazine pigments, quinacridone pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, pyrrole pigments, Thioindigo pigments, metal complex pigments (metal salt dyes), dithiol metal complex pigments, indole phenol pigments, triallyl methane ( triallyl methane pigment, anthraquinone pigment, bisoxazine pigment, naphthol pigment, azomethine pigment, benzimidazolone pigment, picanthrone (Pyranthrone) pigments and Shirene (threne) pigments.

上述無機系顏料係可舉例如:碳黑、鈷系色素、鐵系色素、鉻系色素、鈦系色素、釩系色素、鋯系色素、鉬系色素、釕系色素、鉑系色素、ITO(氧化銦錫)系色素、ATO(氧化銻錫)系色素等。Examples of the inorganic pigments include carbon black, cobalt pigments, iron pigments, chromium pigments, titanium pigments, vanadium pigments, zirconium pigments, molybdenum pigments, ruthenium pigments, platinum pigments, and ITO ( Indium tin oxide) type pigment, ATO (antimony tin oxide) type pigment, etc.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的著色劑(I),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The coloring agent (I) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination and ratio The department can be chosen arbitrarily.

當使用著色劑(I)的情況,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含量係只要配合目的再行適當調整便可。例如藉由調整熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含量而調整保護膜的光穿透性,便可調整對保護膜施行雷射刻印時的刻印檢視性。又,藉由調整熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含量,亦可提升保護膜的設計性、不易看到半導體晶圓背面的研削痕等。若考慮此點,在組成物(III-1)中,著色劑(I)含量相對於溶劑以外所有成分總含量的比例(即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含量),較佳係0.1~10質量%、更佳係0.1~7.5質量%、特佳係0.1~5質量%。藉由著色劑(I)的上述含量達上述下限值以上,便可使由使用著色劑(I)所造成效果更加明顯。又,藉由著色劑(I)的上述含量在上述上限值以下,便抑制熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的光穿透性的過度降低。When the coloring agent (I) is used, the content of the coloring agent (I) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be adjusted appropriately according to the purpose. For example, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and adjusting the light permeability of the protective film, the visibility of the marking when laser marking the protective film can be adjusted. Moreover, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) of the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the design of the protective film can also be improved, and the grinding marks on the back surface of the semiconductor wafer are not easily seen. Considering this point, in the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the coloring agent (I) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the content of the coloring agent (I) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film) It is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 7.5% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. When the above content of the colorant (I) reaches the above lower limit value, the effect caused by the use of the colorant (I) can be made more obvious. In addition, when the content of the coloring agent (I) is equal to or less than the upper limit value, the excessive decrease in light permeability of the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film is suppressed.

[通用添加劑(J)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有通用添加劑(J)。 通用添加劑(J)係可為公知物,可配合目的再行任意選擇,並無特別的限定,較佳係可舉例如:可塑劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、吸氣(gettering)劑等。[General Additive (J)] The composition (III-1) and the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a general-purpose additive (J) as long as it does not damage the effect of the present invention. The general-purpose additive (J) system may be a publicly known product, and can be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose, and is not particularly limited. Preferred examples include plasticizers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, gettering agents, and the like.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的通用添加劑(J),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中的通用添加劑(J)含量,並無特別的限定,只要配合目的再行適當選擇便可。The general additive (J) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination and ratio The department can be chosen arbitrarily. The content of the general-purpose additive (J) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose.

[溶劑] 組成物(III-1)以進一步含有溶劑為佳。含有溶劑的組成物(III-1)的處置性呈良好。 上述溶劑並無特別的限定,較佳係可舉例如:甲苯、二甲苯等烴類;甲醇、乙醇、2-丙醇、異丁基醇(2-甲基丙烷-1-醇)、1-丁醇等醇類;醋酸乙酯等酯類;丙酮、甲乙酮等酮類;四氫呋喃等醚類;二甲基甲醯胺、N-甲基吡咯啶酮等醯胺類(具醯胺鍵的化合物)等。 組成物(III-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Solvent] It is preferable that the composition (III-1) further contains a solvent. The disposability of the solvent-containing composition (III-1) was good. The solvent is not particularly limited, and preferred examples include hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, isobutyl alcohol (2-methylpropane-1-ol), 1- Alcohols such as butanol; esters such as ethyl acetate; ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; amides such as dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone (compounds with amide bonds) )Wait. The solvent system contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

組成物(III-1)所含有的溶劑,就從使組成物(III-1)中的含有成分能更均勻混合的觀點,較佳係甲乙酮等。The solvent contained in the composition (III-1) is preferably methyl ethyl ketone or the like from the viewpoint of allowing the components contained in the composition (III-1) to be more uniformly mixed.

<<熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物之製造方法>> 組成物(III-1)等熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物,係藉由摻合構成其的各成分便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與除溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋狀態下,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分施行混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Method for manufacturing composition for forming thermosetting protective film>> The composition for forming a thermosetting protective film such as the composition (III-1) can be obtained by blending the components constituting the same. The order of addition of each component during blending is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any of the blended components other than the solvent, and then the blended component can be used after pre-dilution. It can also be used without any blended components other than the solvent. Next, the solvent is mixed with these blending components for use. At the time of blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves It is appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each blending component does not deteriorate, as long as it is appropriately adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

○能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,可列舉含有能量線硬化性成分(a)者,較佳係含有能量線硬化性成分(a)與填充材。 能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,能量線硬化性成分(a)以未硬化為佳,較佳係具有黏著性、更佳係未硬化且具有黏著性。此處所謂「能量線」與「能量線硬化性」係同前所說明。○ Thin film for forming energy ray curable protective film The film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film includes those containing an energy ray-curable component (a), and preferably contains an energy ray-curable component (a) and a filler. In the thin film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, the energy ray-curable component (a) is preferably uncured, preferably it has adhesiveness, and more preferably it is uncured and has adhesiveness. Here, the so-called "energy ray" and "energy ray hardenability" are the same as described above.

將能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜貼附於半導體晶圓的背面之後,使硬化時的硬化條件係在使硬化物成為能充分發揮機能之程度的硬化度前提下,並無特別的限定,只要配合能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的種類再行適當選擇便可。 例如能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜進行硬化時,能量線的照度較佳係120~280mW/cm2 。而,上述硬化時,能量線的光通量較佳係100~1000mJ/cm2After the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, the curing conditions during curing are not particularly limited as long as the cured product has a degree of curing to the extent that it can fully function. The type of the thin film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film may be selected as appropriate. For example, when the thin film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film is cured, the illuminance of the energy ray is preferably 120 to 280 mW/cm 2 . In addition, in the above curing, the luminous flux of the energy ray is preferably 100 to 1000 mJ/cm 2 .

<能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(IV-1)> 較佳的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物可列舉例如:含有上述能量線硬化性成分(a)的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(IV-1)(本說明書中亦簡稱為「組成物(IV-1)」)等。<Composition for forming an energy beam curable protective film (IV-1)> A preferred composition for forming an energy ray-curable protective film includes, for example, the composition for forming an energy ray-curable protective film (IV-1) containing the above-mentioned energy ray-curable component (a) (also abbreviated as “abbreviated” in this specification). "Composition (IV-1)") etc.

[能量線硬化性成分(a)] 能量線硬化性成分(a)係藉由能量線照射會硬化的成分,亦屬於供對能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等,且經硬化後形成硬質保護膜用的成分。 能量線硬化性成分(a)可列舉例如:具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量80000~2000000的聚合體(a1);以及具能量線硬化性基且分子量100~80000的化合物(a2)。上述聚合體(a1)係可至少其中一部分利用交聯劑進行交聯、亦可並未被交聯。[Energy ray hardening component (a)] The energy ray-curable component (a) is a component that can be cured by irradiation with energy ray, and also belongs to the film-forming property, flexibility, etc. that is provided to the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, and hardened to form a hard protective film Used ingredients. Examples of the energy ray-curable component (a) include a polymer (a1) having an energy ray-curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000; and a compound (a2) having an energy ray-curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000. The polymer (a1) may be cross-linked with a cross-linking agent at least in part, or may not be cross-linked.

(具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量80000~2000000的聚合體(a1)) 具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量80000~2000000的聚合體(a1)可列舉例如:由具有能與其他化合物所具有基產生反應之官能基的丙烯酸系聚合體(a11),與具有會與上述官能基產生反應之基及具有能量線硬化性雙鍵等能量線硬化性基的能量線硬化性化合物(a12),進行反應而生成的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)。(A polymer with an energy ray-curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000 (a1)) Examples of the polymer (a1) having an energy ray-curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000 include acrylic polymers (a11) having a functional group capable of reacting with groups possessed by other compounds, and having The acrylic resin (a1-1) produced by reacting the functional group generating reaction group and the energy ray-curable compound (a12) having an energy ray-curable group such as an energy ray-curable double bond.

能與其他化合物所具有之基產生反應的上述官能基,係可舉例如:羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基(胺基的1個或2個氫原子被氫原子以外之基所取代的基)、環氧基等。但,就從防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片等的電路的腐蝕之觀點,上述官能基較佳係羧基以外的基。 這些之中,上述官能基較佳係羥基。The above functional groups that can react with groups possessed by other compounds include, for example, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, amine groups, and substituted amine groups (one or two hydrogen atoms of an amine group are replaced by groups other than hydrogen atoms) Radical), epoxy, etc. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of circuits such as semiconductor wafers and semiconductor wafers, the functional group is preferably a group other than a carboxyl group. Among these, the functional group is preferably a hydroxyl group.

‧具有官能基的丙烯酸系聚合體(a11) 具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)係可舉例如:由具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體、與未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體進行共聚合而形成者,這些單體之外,尚亦可由丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)進行共聚合者。 再者,上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)係可為無規共聚物、亦可為嵌段共聚物,關於聚合方法亦可採用公知方法。‧Acrylic polymer with functional groups (a11) Examples of the acrylic polymer (a11) having the above-mentioned functional group include those formed by copolymerizing an acrylic monomer having the above-mentioned functional group with an acrylic monomer not having the above-mentioned functional group. In addition, it is also possible to copolymerize monomers other than acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers). In addition, the said acrylic polymer (a11) system may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer, and a well-known method can also be used for a polymerization method.

具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:含羥基單體、含羧基單體、含胺基單體、取代含胺基單體、含環氧基單體等。Examples of the acrylic single system having the above functional group include a hydroxyl group-containing monomer, a carboxyl group-containing monomer, an amine group-containing monomer, a substituted amine group-containing monomer, and an epoxy group-containing monomer.

上述含羥基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羥烷基酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇等非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(未具(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架的不飽和醇)等。Examples of the above-mentioned hydroxyl-containing single system include hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid-3 -Hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, etc. ; Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol and allyl alcohol (unsaturated alcohols without a (meth)acryloyl skeleton); etc.

上述含羧基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸、巴豆酸等乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具乙烯性不飽和鍵的單羧酸);反丁烯二酸、衣康酸、順丁烯二酸、檸康酸等乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具乙烯性不飽和鍵的二羧酸);上述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酸酐;甲基丙烯酸-2-羧乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羧烷基酯等等。Examples of the carboxyl-containing monosystem include: (meth)acrylic acid, crotonic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids with an ethylenically unsaturated bond); fumaric acid, itaconic acid, cis Ethylene unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as butenedioic acid and citraconic acid (dicarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds); anhydrides of the above ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxyethyl methacrylate, etc. Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylate and so on.

上述具有官能基的丙烯酸系單體較佳係含羥基單體。The acrylic monomer having a functional group is preferably a hydroxyl group-containing monomer.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)且具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (a11) and having the functional group may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯(亦稱「(甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯」)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯(亦稱「(甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯」)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯(亦稱「(甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯」)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯(亦稱「(甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯」)等,構成烷基酯的烷基係碳數1~18之鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等。Examples of the acrylic-based single system that does not have the above functional groups include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, ( N-butyl meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Hexyl ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate , Isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (also known as "lauryl (meth)acrylate" "), tridecyl (meth)acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (also known as "myristyl (meth)acrylate"), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, Cetyl (meth)acrylate (also known as "palmityl (meth)acrylate"), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (also known as "( "Stearyl meth)acrylate"), etc., an alkyl (meth)acrylate alkyl group having a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms which constitutes an alkyl ester.

再者,未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基乙酯等含烷氧烷基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;含(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯等(甲基)丙烯酸芳酯等且具芳香族基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;非交聯性(甲基)丙烯醯胺及其衍生物;(甲基)丙烯酸-N,N-二甲胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-N,N-二甲胺基丙酯等具非交聯性三級胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。In addition, the acrylic monomer which does not have the above-mentioned functional group includes, for example, methoxymethyl (meth)acrylate, methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, and ethoxymethyl (meth)acrylate (Meth)acrylates containing alkoxyalkyl groups such as esters and ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylates; aromatic groups containing (meth)acrylic acid aryls such as phenyl (meth)acrylates ( Methacrylates; non-crosslinkable (meth)acrylamide and its derivatives; (meth)acrylic acid-N,N-dimethylaminoethyl, (meth)acrylic acid-N,N-di (Meth) acrylates with non-crosslinkable tertiary amine groups, such as methylaminopropyl esters.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)且未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The acrylic monomer that constitutes the acrylic polymer (a11) and does not have the functional group may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected .

上述非丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:乙烯、降莰烯等烯烴;醋酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。 構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)的上述非丙烯酸系單體,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。Examples of the non-acrylic mono-system include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; and styrene. The non-acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (a11) may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)中,由具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體所衍生之構成單元量,相對於構成其之構成單元總量的比例(含量),較佳係0.1~50質量%、更佳係1~40質量%、特佳係3~30質量%。藉由上述比例在此種範圍內,由上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)與上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)共聚合獲得的上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)中,能量線硬化性基的含量便可輕易將保護膜的硬化程度調整於較佳範圍內。In the acrylic polymer (a11), the proportion (content) of the constituent units derived from the acrylic monomer having the functional group with respect to the total constituent units constituting it is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass , 1~40% by mass of better series, 3~30% by mass of special series. With the above ratio in this range, in the acrylic resin (a1-1) obtained by copolymerizing the acrylic polymer (a11) and the energy ray-curable compound (a12), the energy ray-curable group has The content can easily adjust the hardening degree of the protective film to a better range.

構成上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The acrylic polymer (a11) constituting the acrylic resin (a1-1) may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected.

組成物(IV-1)中,丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)含量相對於溶劑除外之成分總含量的比例(即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)含量),較佳係1~70質量%、更佳係5~60質量%、特佳係10~50質量%。The ratio of the content of the acrylic resin (a1-1) to the total content of the components excluding the solvent in the composition (IV-1) (that is, the acrylic resin (a1-1) in the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film Content), preferably 1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, and particularly preferably 10 to 50% by mass.

‧能量線硬化性化合物(a12) 上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)中,能與上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)所具有官能基產生反應的基,較佳係具有從異氰酸酯基、環氧基及羧基所構成群組中選擇1種或2種以上,更佳係上述基係具有異氰酸酯基。上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係例如當上述基具有異氰酸酯基的情況,此異氰酸酯基輕易與具有上述官能基為羥基之丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)的羥基反應。‧Energy ray hardening compound (a12) In the above energy ray-curable compound (a12), a group capable of reacting with the functional group contained in the acrylic polymer (a11), preferably having a group selected from the group consisting of isocyanate group, epoxy group and carboxyl group One kind or two or more kinds, more preferably, the above-mentioned group has an isocyanate group. The energy ray-curable compound (a12) is, for example, when the group has an isocyanate group, and the isocyanate group easily reacts with the hydroxyl group of the acrylic polymer (a11) having the functional group as a hydroxyl group.

上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)的1分子中之上述能量線硬化性基,較佳係具有1~5個、更佳係具有1~3個。The energy ray-curable group in one molecule of the energy ray-curable compound (a12) preferably has 1 to 5, and more preferably 1 to 3.

上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係可舉例如:異氰酸-2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙酯、間異丙烯基-α,α-二甲苄基異氰酸酯、甲基丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、異氰酸烯丙酯、異氰酸-1,1-(雙丙烯醯氧基甲基)乙酯; 由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物與(甲基)丙烯酸羥乙酯反應,而獲得的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物; 由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物、多元醇化合物、及(甲基)丙烯酸羥乙酯進行反應,而獲得的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物等。 這些之中,上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)較佳係異氰酸-2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙酯。Examples of the energy ray-curable compound (a12) include isocyanato-2-methacryloyloxyethyl, m-isopropenyl-α,α-dimethylbenzyl isocyanate, and methacryloyl isocyanate. , Allyl isocyanate, 1,1-(bisacryloyloxymethyl) ethyl isocyanate; Acryloyl monoisocyanate compound obtained by reacting diisocyanate compound or polyisocyanate compound with hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate; The acrylic monoisocyanate compound obtained by reacting a diisocyanate compound or a polyisocyanate compound, a polyol compound, and hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate is obtained. Among these, the energy ray-curable compound (a12) is preferably 2-methacryloxyethyl isocyanate.

構成上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The energy ray-curable compound (a12) constituting the acrylic resin (a1-1) may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system may be arbitrarily selected .

上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)中,由上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)所衍生的能量線硬化性基的含量,相對於由上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)所衍生的上述官能基的含量的比例,較佳係20~120莫耳%、更佳係35~100莫耳%、特佳係50~100莫耳%。藉由上述含量的比例在此種範圍內,經硬化後的保護膜接著力變為更大。另外,當上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係單官能基(上述基在1分子中僅具有1個)化合物的情況,上述含量的比例上限值成為100莫耳%,但當上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係多官能基(上述基在1分子中具有2個以上)化合物的情況,上述含量的比例上限值便會超過100莫耳%。In the acrylic resin (a1-1), the content of the energy ray-curable group derived from the energy ray-curable compound (a12) is relative to that of the functional group derived from the acrylic polymer (a11) The content ratio is preferably 20 to 120 mol%, more preferably 35 to 100 mol%, and particularly good 50 to 100 mol%. When the ratio of the above content is within this range, the protective force of the hardened protective film becomes greater. In addition, when the above energy ray-curable compound (a12) is a monofunctional group (the above group has only one in one molecule) compound, the upper limit of the ratio of the above content becomes 100 mol%, but when the above energy ray When the curable compound (a12) is a multifunctional group (the above group has two or more in one molecule), the upper limit of the ratio of the above content will exceed 100 mol%.

上述聚合體(a1)的重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳係100000~2000000、更佳係300000~1500000。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (a1) is preferably 100,000 to 2,000,000, and more preferably 300,000 to 1,500,000.

當上述聚合體(a1)係至少其一部分利用交聯劑而被交聯的情況,上述聚合體(a1)係可並不屬於就構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)所說明的上述任一單體,且可以是由具有會與交聯劑反應之基的單體進行聚合,在會與上述交聯劑進行反應的基被交聯者,亦可以是在上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)所衍生會與上述官能基產生反應的基進行交聯者。When at least a part of the polymer (a1) is cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, the polymer (a1) may not belong to any of the above-mentioned monomers described for the formation of the acrylic polymer (a11) It may be polymerized by a monomer having a group that will react with a crosslinking agent, and the group that will react with the above crosslinking agent is crosslinked, or it may be the above energy ray-curable compound (a12) Those derived will undergo crosslinking with groups that react with the above functional groups.

組成物(IV-1)與能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述聚合體(a1),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The polymer (a1) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the thin film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds are combined, the combination The ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

(具能量線硬化性基且分子量100~80000的化合物(a2)) 具能量線硬化性基且分子量100~80000的化合物(a2)中,上述能量線硬化性基可列舉含有能量線硬化性雙鍵的基,較佳可列舉:(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基等。(Compound (a2) with an energy ray-curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000) In the compound (a2) having an energy ray-curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000, the energy ray-curable group includes a group containing an energy ray-curable double bond, and preferably includes a (meth)acryloyl group and ethylene Base etc.

上述化合物(a2)係在滿足上述條件前提下,並無特別的限定,可例如:具有能量線硬化性基的低分子量化合物、具有能量線硬化性基的環氧樹脂、具有能量線硬化性基的酚樹脂等。The compound (a2) is not particularly limited as long as the above conditions are satisfied, and may be, for example, a low molecular weight compound having an energy ray-curable group, an epoxy resin having an energy ray-curable group, or an energy ray-curable group Of phenol resin etc.

上述化合物(a2)中,具有能量線硬化性基的低分子量化合物可列舉:多官能基的單體或寡聚物等,較佳係具有(甲基)丙烯醯基的丙烯酸酯系化合物。 上述丙烯酸酯系化合物係可舉例如:2-羥-3-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基甲基丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、丙氧基化乙氧基化雙酚A二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基聚乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、乙氧基化雙酚A二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基二乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、9,9-雙[4-(2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙氧基)苯基]茀、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基聚丙氧基)苯基]丙烷、三環癸烷二甲醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,10-癸二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,6-己二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,9-壬二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、三丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、聚丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、聚伸丁二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、三乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、新戊二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、乙氧基化聚丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2-羥-1,3-二(甲基)丙烯氧基丙烷等雙官能基(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 異三聚氰酸參[2-(甲基)丙烯氧基乙酯]、ε-己內酯改質異三聚氰酸參[2-(甲基)丙烯氧基乙酯]、乙氧基化甘油三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、三羥甲基丙烷三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二(三羥甲基丙烷)四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、乙氧基化新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多官能基(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物等多官能基(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物等。Among the above-mentioned compounds (a2), the low-molecular-weight compound having an energy ray-curable group may include a polyfunctional monomer or oligomer, and the like is preferably an acrylate compound having a (meth)acryloyl group. Examples of the acrylate compound system include 2-hydroxy-3-(meth)acryloxypropyl methacrylate, polyethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], propoxylated ethyl Oxidized bisphenol A di[(meth)acrylate], 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxypolyethoxy)phenyl]propane, ethoxylated bisphenol A di [(Meth)acrylate], 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxydiethoxy)phenyl]propane, 9,9-bis[4-(2-(methyl) Acryloyloxyethoxy)phenyl] stilbene, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxypolypropyloxy)phenyl]propane, tricyclodecane dimethanol di[(methyl) Acrylate], 1,10-decanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,6-hexanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,9-nonanediol di[(methyl ) Acrylate], dipropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], tripropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], polypropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], polybutylene glycol di[(meth) Base) acrylate], ethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], diethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], triethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], 2,2 -Bis[4-((meth)acryloxyethoxy)phenyl]propane, neopentyl glycol di[(meth)acrylate], ethoxylated polypropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate ], 2-hydroxy-1,3-di (meth) propyleneoxy propane and other bifunctional (meth) acrylate; Isocyanurate ginseng [2-(meth)acryloxyethyl], ε-caprolactone modified Isocyanurate ginseng [2-(meth)acryloxyethyl], ethoxy Glycerin tris[(meth)acrylate], neopentaerythritol tri[(meth)acrylate], trimethylolpropane tri[(meth)acrylate], di(trimethylolpropane) tetra [(Meth)acrylate], ethoxylated neopentaerythritol tetra[(meth)acrylate], neopentaerythritol tetra[(meth)acrylate], dipentaerythritol poly(methyl ) Multifunctional (meth)acrylates such as acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate; Multifunctional (meth)acrylate oligomers such as urethane (meth)acrylate oligomers.

上述化合物(a2)中,具能量線硬化性基之環氧樹脂、具能量線硬化性基之酚樹脂,例如可使用日本專利「特開2013-194102號公報」中在段落0043等處所記載者。此種樹脂亦屬於後述構成熱硬化性成分的樹脂,在本發明中視為上述化合物(a2)。Among the above compound (a2), the epoxy resin having an energy ray-curable group and the phenol resin having an energy ray-curable group can be, for example, those described in paragraph 0043 of Japanese Patent No. 2013-194102, etc. . Such a resin also belongs to a resin constituting a thermosetting component described later, and is regarded as the above-mentioned compound (a2) in the present invention.

上述化合物(a2)的重量平均分子量較佳係100~30000、更佳係300~10000。The weight average molecular weight of the compound (a2) is preferably 100 to 30,000, and more preferably 300 to 10,000.

組成物(IV-1)與能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述化合物(a2),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned compound (a2) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and if two or more kinds, the combination of The ratio is optional.

[未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)] 組成物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的上述能量線硬化性成分(a)含有上述化合物(a2)的情況,以亦進一步含有未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)為佳。 上述聚合體(b)係可至少其中一部分利用交聯劑進行交聯,亦可未被交聯。[Polymers without energy ray-curable groups (b)] When the energy ray-curable component (a) of the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film contains the compound (a2), it may further contain a polymer without an energy ray-curable group (b) is better. At least a part of the polymer (b) may be cross-linked with a cross-linking agent, or may not be cross-linked.

未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)係可舉例如:丙烯酸系聚合體、苯氧樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚酯、橡膠系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂等。 這些之中,上述聚合體(b)較佳係丙烯酸系聚合體(以下亦簡稱「丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)」)。Examples of the polymer (b) system without an energy ray-curable group include acrylic polymers, phenoxy resins, urethane resins, polyesters, rubber-based resins, and acrylic urethane resins. Among these, the polymer (b) is preferably an acrylic polymer (hereinafter also simply referred to as "acrylic polymer (b-1)").

丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)係可為公知物,例如:可為單1種丙烯酸系單體的單聚物,亦可為2種以上丙烯酸系單體的共聚物,亦可由1種或2種以上丙烯酸系單體、與1種或2種以上的丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)的共聚物。The acrylic polymer (b-1) system may be a well-known product. For example, it may be a single polymer of a single acrylic monomer, or a copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers, or may be composed of one or Copolymers of two or more acrylic monomers and monomers other than one or more acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers).

構成丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)的上述丙烯酸系單體,係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯、具環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。此處,所謂「取代胺基」係如同前所說明。The acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) includes, for example, alkyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate having a cyclic skeleton, and (propylene-containing) ( Methacrylates, hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates, substituted amine-containing (meth)acrylates, etc. Here, the so-called "substituted amine group" is as described above.

上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯)等,構成烷基酯的烷基係碳數1~18之鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等。Examples of the (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester system include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth) Group) n-butyl acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate Ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate, Isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (A Group) Tridecyl acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, cetyl (meth)acrylate Esters (palmityl (meth)acrylate), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc. It is an alkyl (meth)acrylate with a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms.

上述具環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯氧基乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯氧基烷基酯等等。Examples of the (meth)acrylates having a cyclic skeleton include cycloalkyl (meth)acrylates such as isobornyl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate; Aryl (meth)acrylate such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyl (meth)acrylate such as (cyclopentenyl) (meth)acrylate; (Meth)acrylic acid cyclopentenyloxyalkyl ester and the like.

上述含有環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。 上述含有羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等。 上述含有取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸-N-甲胺基乙酯等。Examples of the glycidyl group-containing (meth)acrylate system include glycidyl (meth)acrylate. Examples of the above-mentioned hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates include hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth) Group) 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, and the like. Examples of the above-mentioned substituted amine group-containing (meth)acrylate system include N-methylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate.

構成丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)的上述非丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:乙烯、降莰烯等烯烴;醋酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。Examples of the non-acrylic monomer system constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) include: olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; styrene and the like.

至少其中一部分利用交聯劑進行交聯後的上述未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b),係可舉例如:由上述聚合體(b)中的反應性官能基與交聯劑產生反應後者。 上述反應性官能基係只要依照交聯劑的種類等再行適當選擇便可,並無特別的限定。例如當交聯劑係聚異氰酸酯化合物的情況,上述反應性官能基可列舉:羥基、羧基、胺基等,這些之中,較佳係與異氰酸酯基的反應性高之羥基。又,當交聯劑係環氧系化合物的情況,上述反應性官能基可列舉:羧基、胺基、醯胺基等,這些之中,較佳係與環氧基的反應性高之羧基。但,就從防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片的電路的腐蝕之觀點,上述反應性官能基較佳係羧基以外的基。At least a part of the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable groups after crosslinking with a crosslinking agent may be derived from, for example, the reactive functional group and crosslinking agent in the polymer (b) React to the latter. The above-mentioned reactive functional group system is not particularly limited as long as it is appropriately selected according to the type of crosslinking agent and the like. For example, in the case of a cross-linking agent-based polyisocyanate compound, the reactive functional group may include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, an amine group, and the like. Among these, a hydroxyl group having high reactivity with an isocyanate group is preferred. In the case of a crosslinking agent-based epoxy compound, the reactive functional group may include a carboxyl group, an amine group, an amide group, and the like. Among these, a carboxyl group having a high reactivity with an epoxy group is preferred. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of the semiconductor wafer and the circuit of the semiconductor wafer, the reactive functional group is preferably a group other than the carboxyl group.

上述具有反應性官能基的未具能量線硬化性基之聚合體(b),可列舉:由至少具有上述反應性官能基的單體進行聚合而獲得者。丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)的情況,只要將就構成其的單體所列舉之上述丙烯酸系單體及非丙烯酸系單體中之任一者或雙方,使用為具有上述反應性官能基者便可。反應性官能基係具有羥基的上述聚合體(b),可列舉例如:由含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯進行聚合而獲得者,除此之外,尚亦可列舉由前所列舉的上述丙烯酸系單體或非丙烯酸系單體中,1個或2個以上氫原子被上述反應性官能基所取代形成的單體,進行聚合而獲得者。Examples of the polymer (b) having no reactive energy-curable groups having reactive functional groups include those obtained by polymerizing monomers having at least the reactive functional groups. In the case of the acrylic polymer (b-1), as long as any one or both of the above-mentioned acrylic monomers and non-acrylic monomers listed as monomers constituting it are used, they have the above-mentioned reactive functional group Can. The above-mentioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group having a hydroxyl group may, for example, be obtained by polymerizing a (meth)acrylate containing a hydroxyl group, and in addition to the above-mentioned ones Among acrylic monomers or non-acrylic monomers, monomers in which one or more hydrogen atoms are substituted with the above-mentioned reactive functional groups are obtained by polymerization.

具有反應性官能基的上述聚合體(b)中,由具反應性官能基的單體所衍生構成單元的量,相對於構成具有反應性官能基的上述聚合體(b)的構成單元總量之比例(含量),較佳係1~20質量%、更佳係2~10質量%。藉由上述比例在此種範圍內,上述聚合體(b)的交聯程度便可成為更佳範圍。In the above polymer (b) having a reactive functional group, the amount of structural units derived from the monomer having a reactive functional group relative to the total number of structural units constituting the above polymer (b) having a reactive functional group The ratio (content) is preferably 1-20% by mass, and more preferably 2-10% by mass. When the above ratio is in this range, the degree of crosslinking of the polymer (b) can become a better range.

未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)的重量平均分子量(Mw),就從使組成物(IV-1)的造膜性更良好之觀點,較佳係10000~2000000、更佳係100000~ 1500000。此處所謂「重量平均分子量」係如前所說明。The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group is preferably from 10,000 to 2,000,000, and more preferably from the viewpoint of making the film-forming property of the composition (IV-1) better. 100000~ 1500000. Here, the "weight average molecular weight" is as described above.

組成物(IV-1)與能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The polymer (b) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film that does not have an energy ray-curable group may be only one type, or two or more types, if two types In the above cases, the combination and ratio can be arbitrarily selected.

組成物(IV-1)可列舉:含有上述聚合體(a1)與上述化合物(a2)中任一者或雙方者。而,當組成物(IV-1)係含有上述化合物(a2)的情況,較佳係進一步亦含有未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b),此情況亦較佳進一步含有上述(a1)。又,組成物(IV-1)亦可未含有上述化合物(a2),而是上述聚合體(a1)與未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)均含有。The composition (IV-1) may include any one or both of the polymer (a1) and the compound (a2). However, when the composition (IV-1) contains the above-mentioned compound (a2), it is preferable to further contain the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group, and in this case, it is also preferable to further contain the above-mentioned (a1 ). In addition, the composition (IV-1) may not contain the above-mentioned compound (a2), but may contain both the above-mentioned polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group.

當組成物(IV-1)係含有上述聚合體(a1)、上述化合物(a2)及未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)的情況,組成物(IV-1)中,上述化合物(a2)的含量,相對於上述聚合體(a1)與未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)的總含量100質量份,較佳係10~400質量份、更佳係30~350質量份。When the composition (IV-1) contains the polymer (a1), the compound (a2), and the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group, in the composition (IV-1), the compound The content of (a2) is 100 parts by mass relative to the total content of the polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group, preferably 10 to 400 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 350 parts Quality parts.

組成物(IV-1)中,上述能量線硬化性成分(a)與未具能量線硬化性基之聚合體(b)的合計含量,相對於溶劑以外成分總含量的比例(即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中的上述能量線硬化性成分(a)與未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)之合計含量),較佳係5~90質量%、更佳係10~80質量%、特佳係20~70質量%。藉由能量線硬化性成分含量的上述比例設在此種範圍內,便可使能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的能量線硬化性更良好。In the composition (IV-1), the ratio of the total content of the energy ray-curable component (a) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray-curable group to the total content of the components other than the solvent (ie, energy ray The total content of the energy ray-curable component (a) and the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group in the film for forming a curable protective film) is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, more preferably 10 ~80% by mass, 20~70% by mass of Tejia. By setting the above ratio of the content of the energy ray curable component within such a range, the energy ray curability of the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film can be made better.

組成物(IV-1)係上述能量線硬化性成分以外,配合目的尚亦可含有從熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑所構成群組中選擇1種或2種以上。The composition (IV-1) is in addition to the above-mentioned energy ray-curable components, and the blending purpose may also include thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants, and general additives. Select one type or two or more types in the group.

例如藉由使用上述含有能量線硬化性成分與熱硬化性成分的組成物(IV-1),便可提升所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜利用加熱對被黏物的接著力,且由此能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所形成保護膜的強度亦獲提升。 再者,藉由使用上述含有能量線硬化性成分及著色劑的組成物(IV-1),所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,便可顯現出與前所說明熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有著色劑(I)情況同樣的效果。For example, by using the above-mentioned composition (IV-1) containing an energy ray-curable component and a thermosetting component, the adhesive force of the formed thin film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film by heating can be improved, And the strength of the protective film formed by the thin film for forming an energy ray-curable protective film is also improved. Furthermore, by using the above-mentioned composition (IV-1) containing the energy ray-curable component and the coloring agent, the formed energy ray-curable protective film-forming film can exhibit the thermosetting protection described above. The same effect is obtained when the film for film formation contains the colorant (I).

組成物(IV-1)的上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑,分別可列舉與組成物(III-1)的熱硬化性成分(B)、填充材(D)、偶合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、光聚合起始劑(H)、著色劑(I)及通用添加劑(J)相同物。The above-mentioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, coloring agents and general-purpose additives of the composition (IV-1) can be exemplified by thermosetting with the composition (III-1) The same as the sexual component (B), the filler (D), the coupling agent (E), the crosslinking agent (F), the photopolymerization initiator (H), the colorant (I), and the general-purpose additive (J).

組成物(IV-1)中,上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑分別係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若併用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。In the composition (IV-1), the above thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general-purpose additives may be used alone or in combination of two or more. If two or more kinds are used together, the combination and ratio system can be arbitrarily selected.

組成物(IV-1)的上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑之含量,係只要配合目的再行適當調整便可,並無特別的限定。The contents of the above thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general additives of the composition (IV-1) may be adjusted as long as they are suitable for the purpose, and No special restrictions.

組成物(IV-1)因為利用稀釋便可提升處置性,因而以進一步含有溶劑為佳。 組成物(IV-1)所含有的溶劑可列舉例如同上述組成物(III-1)的溶劑。 組成物(IV-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上。Since the composition (IV-1) can improve the handling property by dilution, it is preferable to further contain a solvent. The solvent contained in the composition (IV-1) may, for example, be the same solvent as the aforementioned composition (III-1). The solvent system contained in the composition (IV-1) may be only one kind or two or more kinds.

<<能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物之製造方法>> 組成物(IV-1)等能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物係藉由摻合用於構成其的各成分便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋狀態下,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分施行混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Method for manufacturing composition for forming energy beam curable protective film>> The composition for forming an energy ray-curable protective film, such as the composition (IV-1), can be obtained by blending the components that constitute it. The order of addition of each component during blending is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any of the blended components other than the solvent, and then the blended component can be used after pre-dilution. It can also be used without pre-diluted any of the blended components other than the solvent. , The solvent is mixed with these blending components for use. At the time of blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves It is appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each blending component does not deteriorate, as long as it is appropriately adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

○非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 上述非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜雖不會因硬化而呈現特性變化,但本發明中,在貼附於半導體晶圓的上述背面等目標地方之階段,視同已形成保護膜。○Thin film for forming non-curing protective film Although the thin film for forming a non-curable protective film does not show a characteristic change due to curing, in the present invention, it is considered that a protective film has been formed at the stage of attaching to a target place such as the back surface of a semiconductor wafer.

較佳的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜可列舉例如:含有熱可塑性樹脂者。Preferred films for forming a non-curable protective film include, for example, those containing thermoplastic resin.

<非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(V-1)> 非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物係可舉例如:含有上述熱可塑性樹脂的非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(V-1)(本說明書中亦簡稱「組成物(V-1)」)等。<Non-curable protective film forming composition (V-1)> The composition system for forming a non-curable protective film may be, for example, a composition (V-1) for forming a non-curable protective film containing the thermoplastic resin (also referred to as "composition (V-1)" in this specification) Wait.

[熱可塑性樹脂] 上述熱可塑性樹脂並無特別的限定。 上述熱可塑性樹脂,更具體可列舉例如與作為上述組成物(III-1)的含有成分所列舉丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等非硬化性的樹脂為同樣者。[Thermoplastic resin] The thermoplastic resin is not particularly limited. Examples of the thermoplastic resin include acrylic resins, polyesters, polyurethanes, phenoxy resins, polybutene, polybutadiene, and polystyrene. Non-curable resins are the same.

組成物(V-1)及非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述熱可塑性樹脂,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (V-1) and the film for forming a non-curable protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds, and in the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio system Can be chosen arbitrarily.

組成物(V-1)中,上述熱可塑性樹脂的含量相對於溶劑以外成分的總含量的比例(即,非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的上述熱可塑性樹脂的含量),較佳係5~90質量%,例如可為10~80質量%、及20~70質量%等中之任一者。In the composition (V-1), the ratio of the content of the thermoplastic resin to the total content of the components other than the solvent (that is, the content of the thermoplastic resin of the film for forming a non-curable protective film) is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, for example, may be any of 10 to 80% by mass, and 20 to 70% by mass.

組成物(V-1)係上述熱可塑性樹脂之外,配合目的尚亦可含有從填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑所構成群組中選擇1種或2種以上。The composition (V-1) is not only the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, but the blending purpose may also contain one or two or more selected from the group consisting of fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants, and general-purpose additives.

例如藉由使用上述含有熱可塑性樹脂與著色劑的組成物(V-1),則所形成的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,便可顯現出與前所說明當熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有著色劑(I)情況同樣的效果。For example, by using the above-mentioned composition (V-1) containing a thermoplastic resin and a coloring agent, the formed thin film for forming a non-curable protective film can be shown as described above for forming a thermosetting protective film. The film has the same effect as when the coloring agent (I) is contained.

組成物(V-1)中的上述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑,分別可列舉與組成物(III-1)的填充材(D)、偶合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、著色劑(I)及通用添加劑(J)為相同者。Examples of the filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant and general-purpose additives in the composition (V-1) include the filler (D) and coupling agent (E) with the composition (III-1), The crosslinking agent (F), the colorant (I) and the general additive (J) are the same.

組成物(V-1)中,上述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑,分別係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若併用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。In the composition (V-1), the fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants and general-purpose additives may be used alone or in combination of two or more. If two or more are used in combination, The combination and ratio are optional.

組成物(V-1)中,上述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑的含量,係只要配合目的再行適當調整便可,並無特別的限定。In the composition (V-1), the contents of the filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, colorant, and general-purpose additives may be adjusted as long as they are suitable for the purpose, and are not particularly limited.

組成物(V-1)係利用稀釋便可提升處置性,因而以進一步含有溶劑為佳。 組成物(V-1)所含有的溶劑可列舉例如同上述組成物(III-1)的溶劑。 組成物(V-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上。Since the composition (V-1) is diluted to improve handling properties, it is preferable to further contain a solvent. The solvent contained in the composition (V-1) may, for example, be the same solvent as the aforementioned composition (III-1). The solvent system contained in the composition (V-1) may be only one kind or two or more kinds.

<<非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物之製造方法>> 組成物(V-1)等非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物,係藉由摻合構成其的各成分便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋狀態下,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分施行混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Method for manufacturing composition for forming non-curable protective film>> The composition for forming a non-curable protective film such as the composition (V-1) can be obtained by blending the components constituting the same. The order of addition of each component during blending is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any of the blended components other than the solvent, and then the blended component can be used after pre-dilution. It can also be used without pre-diluted any of the blended components other than the solvent. , The solvent is mixed with these blending components for use. At the time of blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, and for example, a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves It is appropriately selected from known methods. The temperature and time at the time of addition and mixing of each component are not particularly limited as long as each blending component does not deteriorate, as long as it is appropriately adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15 to 30°C.

◎其他層 上述支撐片係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,在基材與黏著劑層之外,尚亦可具備上述中間層等其他層。 再者,上述保護膜形成用複合片係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,在基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜之外,尚亦可具備其他層,此情況的上述其他層係可為支撐片所具備的上述其他層,亦可配置成未直接接觸支撐片狀態。 上述其他層係可配合目的再行任意選擇,且種類並無特別的限定。◎Other layers The above-mentioned support sheet is within the range that does not cause damage and the effects of the present invention. In addition to the base material and the adhesive layer, the intermediate layer and other layers may be provided. In addition, the above-mentioned composite film for forming a protective film is within the scope of not damaging and the effects of the present invention, and may include other layers in addition to the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film. The layer system may be the above-mentioned other layers included in the support sheet, or may be arranged so as not to directly contact the support sheet. The other layers described above can be arbitrarily selected according to the purpose, and the type is not particularly limited.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層係非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量係0.3~50質量份,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。An embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film includes, for example, an adhesive layer system which is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains the above-mentioned structural unit derived from at least an alkyl (meth)acrylate. Acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, in the adhesive layer, the content of the crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the acrylic polymer, and the maximum height of the first surface of the substrate Roughness (Rz) is 0.01~8μm.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量係0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合體係具有由烷基碳數達4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元與由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。An embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film includes, for example, an adhesive layer that is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least the above-mentioned structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. Acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, in the adhesive layer, the content of crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to the content of the acrylic polymer above 100 parts by mass, the above acrylic polymer system has an alkyl carbon The structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates with a number of 4 or more and the structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01 to 8 μm.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量係0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合體係具有由烷基碳數達4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元與由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元,在上述丙烯酸系聚合體中,相對於構成單元總量,由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元的含量係1~35質量%,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。An embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film includes, for example, an adhesive layer that is non-energy ray-curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least the above-mentioned structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. Acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, in the adhesive layer, the content of crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to the content of the acrylic polymer above 100 parts by mass, the above acrylic polymer system has an alkyl carbon Structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates having a number of 4 or more and structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers, in the above acrylic polymer, relative to the total amount of structural units, derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers The content of the structural unit is 1 to 35% by mass, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the base material is 0.01 to 8 μm.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性且黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含量100質量份,交聯劑的含量係0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合體係具有由烷基碳數達4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元與由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元,在上述丙烯酸系聚合體中,相對於構成單元總量,由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元的含量係1~35質量%,上述交聯劑係異氰酸酯系交聯劑,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。One embodiment of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film includes, for example, the adhesive layer is non-energy ray-curable and the adhesive layer contains at least the above-mentioned structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylate Acrylic polymer and crosslinking agent, in the adhesive layer, the content of crosslinking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to the content of the acrylic polymer above 100 parts by mass, the above acrylic polymer system has an alkyl carbon Structural units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates having a number of 4 or more and structural units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers, in the above acrylic polymer, relative to the total amount of structural units, derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers The content of the structural unit is 1 to 35% by mass, the cross-linking agent-based isocyanate-based cross-linking agent, and the maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01 to 8 μm.

◇保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法 上述保護膜形成用複合片可例如藉由以下製造方法(本說明書中亦稱「製造方法(S1)」)來製造,其包括:依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序來製作在其厚度方向積層而構成的積層片之步驟(本說明書中亦稱「積層片製作步驟(1)」);以及將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓狀態下保存的步驟(本說明書中亦稱「積層片保存步驟」)。 各層(基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜)的形成方法係如前所說明。 以下,針對上述製造方法(S1),依照各步驟分別進行更詳細說明。◇Manufacturing method of composite sheet for forming protective film The above-mentioned composite film for forming a protective film can be manufactured, for example, by the following manufacturing method (also referred to as "manufacturing method (S1)" in this specification), which includes: in accordance with the order of the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film The step of making a laminate formed by stacking in its thickness direction (also referred to as "layer preparation step (1)" in this specification); and the step of storing the above laminate under pressure in its thickness direction (in this specification) (Also called "Layer Preservation Step"). The formation method of each layer (base material, adhesive layer, and protective film forming film) is as described above. Hereinafter, the manufacturing method (S1) will be described in more detail in accordance with each step.

◎製造方法(S1) <<積層片製作步驟(1)>> 上述積層片製作步驟(1)中,製作依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序,在其厚度方向上積層構成的積層片。 本步驟中,例如藉由依對應上述層(基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜等)位置關係的方式進行積層,而製作具有與目標保護膜形成用複合片相同積層構造的積層片。 另外,本說明書中,所謂「積層片」在無特別聲明前提下,係指如上述具有與目標保護膜形成用複合片相同積層構造,且尚未施行上述積層片保存步驟者。◎Manufacturing method (S1) <<Layer production step (1)>> In the above-mentioned lamination sheet manufacturing step (1), a lamination sheet constructed in the thickness direction in the order of the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the protective film-forming film is produced. In this step, for example, a layered sheet having the same layered structure as the target protective film-forming composite sheet is produced by layering in accordance with the positional relationship of the above layers (base material, adhesive layer, film for forming a protective film, etc.). In addition, in this specification, the "lamination sheet" refers to a person having the same lamination structure as the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film as described above, and has not yet performed the lamination sheet preservation step as described above.

例如製造支撐片時,當在基材上積層黏著劑層時,只要在基材上塗佈上述黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥便可。For example, when manufacturing a support sheet, when an adhesive layer is laminated on a base material, the adhesive composition may be applied on the base material and dried as necessary.

另一方面,例如當在已積層於基材上的黏著劑層上,進一步積層保護膜形成用薄膜的情況,在黏著劑層上塗佈保護膜形成用組成物,便可直接形成保護膜形成用薄膜。保護膜形成用薄膜以外的層亦是使用供形成此層的組成物,依照同樣方法,便可在黏著劑層上積層此層。依此,當使用任一組成物,形成連續的雙層積層構造的情況,在由上述組成物所形成的層上,進一步塗佈組成物便可形成新的層。但,在這2層之後才積層的層,較好預先在其他剝離薄膜上使用上述組成物形成,再將會與此已形成層中與上述剝離薄膜接觸側的相反側的露出面,與已形成的剩餘層的露出面貼合,可形成連續雙層積層構造。此時,上述組成物以塗佈於剝離薄膜的剝離處理面上為佳。剝離薄膜係只要在積層構造形成後,視需要去除便可。On the other hand, for example, when a film for forming a protective film is further laminated on the adhesive layer that has been laminated on the substrate, the protective film forming composition can be directly formed by applying the protective film forming composition on the adhesive layer Use film. The layer other than the thin film for forming a protective film is also a composition for forming this layer, and this layer can be laminated on the adhesive layer according to the same method. Accordingly, when any one of the compositions is used to form a continuous two-layer laminated structure, a new layer can be formed by further applying the composition to the layer formed by the above composition. However, the layer to be stacked after these two layers is preferably formed in advance on the other release film using the above composition, and then the exposed surface of the formed layer on the opposite side to the side in contact with the release film will have The exposed surface of the remaining layer formed is bonded to form a continuous double-layer build-up structure. In this case, the above composition is preferably applied to the peeling treatment surface of the peeling film. The peeling film can be removed as needed after the layered structure is formed.

例如當製造在基材上積層黏著劑層、在上述黏著劑層上積層保護膜形成用薄膜而成的保護膜形成用複合片(支撐片係基材與黏著劑層之積層物的保護膜形成用複合片)時,在基材上塗佈黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥,而在基材上積層黏著劑層,另外在剝離薄膜上塗佈保護膜形成用組成物,視需要施行乾燥,而在剝離薄膜上形成保護膜形成用薄膜。然後,將此保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面,與已積層於基材上的黏著劑層露出面貼合,使保護膜形成用薄膜積層於黏著劑層上,便可獲得上述積層片。For example, when manufacturing an adhesive layer formed by laminating an adhesive layer on a substrate and laminating a protective film forming film on the adhesive layer (a support film is formed by a protective film of a laminate of a substrate and an adhesive layer) When using a composite sheet), apply the adhesive composition on the substrate and dry it if necessary, and laminate the adhesive layer on the substrate and apply the protective film forming composition on the release film and dry it if necessary , And a protective film forming film is formed on the peeling film. Then, the exposed surface of the protective film forming film is bonded to the exposed surface of the adhesive layer that has been laminated on the base material, and the protective film forming film is laminated on the adhesive layer to obtain the above-mentioned laminated sheet.

另外,當在基材上積層黏著劑層時,如上述,亦可取代在基材上塗佈黏著劑組成物的方法,改為在剝離薄膜上塗佈黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥,而在剝離薄膜上形成黏著劑層,再藉由將此層的露出面與基材其中一表面貼合,而將黏著劑層積層於基材上。 不管何種方法,剝離薄膜均係在形成目標積層構造後的任意時序中去除便可。In addition, when the adhesive layer is laminated on the substrate, as described above, it is also possible to replace the method of applying the adhesive composition on the substrate, instead applying the adhesive composition on the release film, and drying if necessary. An adhesive layer is formed on the peeling film, and then the exposed surface of the layer is bonded to one surface of the substrate to laminate the adhesive layer on the substrate. Regardless of the method, the peeling film can be removed at any timing after the target build-up structure is formed.

依此,構成保護膜形成用複合片的基材以外之層,均以預先形成於剝離薄膜上再貼合於目標層的表面之方法便可積層,因而視需要適當選擇採用此種步驟的層,便可製造上述積層片。Accordingly, the layers other than the base material constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be laminated by a method previously formed on the release film and then bonded to the surface of the target layer, so the layer adopting this step is appropriately selected as necessary , The above laminate can be manufactured.

例如保護膜形成用複合片,通常依在臨支撐片之一面的相反側的最表層(例如保護膜形成用薄膜)表面貼合剝離薄膜的狀態下進行保管。所以,在此剝離薄膜(較佳係剝離處理面)上,塗佈保護膜形成用組成物等供形成構成最表層的組成物,再視需要施行乾燥,而在剝離薄膜上形成構成最表層的層,再將剩餘的各層依照上述任一方法,積層於與此層中與剝離薄膜接觸側的相反側的露出面上,即便未去除剝離薄膜而維持貼合狀態仍可獲得上述積層片。For example, the composite sheet for forming a protective film is usually stored in a state where a peeling film is bonded to the surface of the outermost layer (for example, the film for forming a protective film) opposite to one surface of the support sheet. Therefore, on this peeling film (preferably a peeling treatment surface), a composition for forming a protective film is applied to form a composition that constitutes the outermost layer, and then drying is performed if necessary, and the composition that constitutes the outermost layer is formed on the peeling film Layer, and then the remaining layers are laminated on the exposed surface on the side opposite to the side in contact with the release film of this layer according to any of the above-mentioned methods. Even if the release film is not removed and the bonded state is maintained, the above-mentioned laminated sheet can be obtained.

當保護膜形成用複合片係包括上述其他層的情況,只要在上述積層片製作步驟(1)的適合時序,以成為適當配置位置的方式,適當追加設置上述其層的步驟便可。When the composite sheet for forming a protective film includes the above-mentioned other layers, the step of providing the above-mentioned layers may be appropriately added so as to be an appropriate arrangement position at a suitable timing in the step (1) of the build-up sheet.

積層片製作步驟(1)中所製作的上述積層片的形狀,並無特別的限定。例如可製作適於呈捲筒狀捲取的長條積層片,但亦可製作非長條的其他形狀的積層片。The shape of the laminate sheet produced in the laminate sheet production step (1) is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to produce a long lamination sheet suitable for winding in a roll shape, but it is also possible to produce a lamination sheet of other shapes that are not elongated.

<<積層片保存步驟>> 上述積層片保存步驟中,將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓的狀態下保存。 本步驟中,將上述積層片在加壓狀態下保存的方法,可列舉例如:將長條的上述積層片捲取呈捲筒狀,在保持此已捲取的積層片狀態下,在將由捲取所生成的壓力施加於積層片單面或雙面狀態下保存的方法;針對未將長條的上述積層片捲取呈捲筒狀而維持展開狀態的積層片、或非為長條的上述積層片,在其單面或雙面施加壓力狀態下保管的方法等。<<Layer storage procedure>> In the lamination sheet storage step, the lamination sheet is stored in a state of being pressed in its thickness direction. In this step, the method of storing the laminated sheet under a pressurized state may include, for example, rolling a long length of the laminated sheet into a roll shape, and maintaining the wound laminated sheet in a state of The method of taking the generated pressure and applying it on one or both sides of the laminate; storing the laminate without winding the elongated laminate in a roll shape, or maintaining the unfolded laminate, or the non-strip The laminated sheet is stored under pressure on one side or both sides.

將長條積層片捲取呈捲筒狀時,積層片以朝長邊方向進行捲取為佳。 捲取積層片時,例如捲取張力較佳係150~170N/m,捲取速度較佳係45~55m/min,捲取張力的漸縮比(taper ratio)(降低率)較佳係85~95%。藉由採用此種捲取條件,便可以更恰當的壓力加壓保存積層片。此種捲取條件係針對例如厚度100~300μm、寬度300~500mm、長度40~60m的積層片特別適用,惟積層片大小並不僅侷限於此。When winding the long laminated sheet into a roll shape, it is better to wind the laminated sheet toward the long side. When winding the laminate, for example, the winding tension is preferably 150 to 170 N/m, the winding speed is preferably 45 to 55 m/min, and the tapering ratio (decrease rate) of the winding tension is preferably 85 ~95%. By adopting such winding conditions, it is possible to pressurize and store the laminated sheet with more appropriate pressure. Such winding conditions are particularly suitable for laminates with a thickness of 100 to 300 μm, a width of 300 to 500 mm, and a length of 40 to 60 m, but the size of the laminate is not limited to this.

積層片係例如可在常溫下或室溫下進行捲取,如後述,亦可在與對所捲取積層片施行加熱加壓保存時的同樣溫度條件下進行捲取。The laminated sheet system can be wound up at normal temperature or room temperature, for example, as described later, or it can be wound up under the same temperature conditions as when the wound laminated sheet is stored under heat and pressure.

呈捲筒狀捲取的積層片係可在常溫下或室溫下保存,但以在加熱狀態下保存為佳。藉由依此施行加熱加壓保存,便可獲得黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性均更優異的保護膜形成用複合片。The laminated sheet system wound in the form of a roll can be stored at normal temperature or room temperature, but it is preferably stored under heating. By performing heat and pressure storage in this way, the buildability between the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film, and the protective film or protective film forming film can be obtained with a more excellent visibility of marking through the support sheet. Use composite tablets.

將積層片呈捲筒狀捲取時,保存時的加熱溫度並無特別的限定,較佳係53~75℃、更佳係55~70℃、特佳係57~65℃。When winding the laminated sheet in a roll shape, the heating temperature during storage is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 53 to 75°C, more preferably 55 to 70°C, and particularly preferably 57 to 65°C.

將積層片呈捲筒狀捲取時的保存時間並無特別的限定,較佳係24~720小時(1~30天)、更佳係48~480小時(2~20天)、特佳係72~240小時(3~10天)。The storage time when the laminated sheet is wound in a roll is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 24 to 720 hours (1 to 30 days), more preferably 48 to 480 hours (2 to 20 days), and especially good 72~240 hours (3~10 days).

呈捲筒狀捲取的積層片亦可例如將保護膜形成用薄膜與支撐片加工成特定形狀,再將依此加工的支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之複數片積層物,於其臨保護膜形成用薄膜之一面貼合於長條剝離薄膜,同時將此剝離薄膜長邊方向呈整齊排列配置。此情況的保護膜形成用薄膜以具有與半導體晶圓相同或幾近相同的平面形狀(通常係圓形狀)為佳。又,此情況的支撐片較好具有與切割裝置中供固定支撐片用的夾具相同或幾近相同的外周的形狀。又,此情況,剝離薄膜的上述積層物貼合面中,以在短邊方向的周緣部附近依不會重疊上述積層物的方式設置帶狀片為佳。此帶狀片係在將積層片呈捲筒狀捲取時,供抑制上述積層物表面出現高度差(本說明書中亦稱「積層痕」)用。上述積層痕係因積層片捲筒中,上述積層物(經加工的支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之積層物)的積層位置在捲筒徑向上未一致,導致對上述積層物表面施加較高壓力造成。若上述帶狀片設置於上述周緣部附近,則不會對上述積層物表面施加此種較高壓力,便抑制出現上述積層痕。The laminated sheet wound in the form of a roll may, for example, process a film for forming a protective film and a support sheet into a specific shape, and then process a plurality of laminates of the film for forming a supporting sheet and a protective film processed in accordance therewith before it is protected One side of the film-forming film is attached to the long release film, and at the same time, the longitudinal direction of the release film is neatly arranged. In this case, the thin film for forming a protective film preferably has the same or almost the same planar shape (usually a circular shape) as the semiconductor wafer. In addition, the support piece in this case preferably has the same or nearly the same outer shape as the jig for fixing the support piece in the cutting device. Moreover, in this case, it is preferable to provide a strip-shaped sheet in the vicinity of the peripheral edge portion in the short-side direction of the laminate bonding surface of the release film so as not to overlap the laminate. This belt-shaped sheet is used to suppress the difference in height of the surface of the layered product (also referred to as "layer mark" in this specification) when the layered sheet is wound in a roll shape. The above-mentioned lamination marks are due to the fact that the lamination position of the laminate (the laminate of the processed support sheet and the film for forming a protective film) in the lamination sheet reel does not match in the radial direction of the reel, resulting in the application of high pressure on the surface of the lamination article Cause. If the belt-shaped sheet is provided near the peripheral edge portion, such a high pressure is not applied to the surface of the laminate, and the occurrence of the laminate mark is suppressed.

當長條積層片非呈捲筒狀捲取而呈展開狀態時,以及積層片非為長條的情況,複數片的這些積層片以進一步積層保存為佳。而,依此將積層片積層時,以使複數片的這些積層片的方向與周緣部位置呈相互對準的狀態為佳。When the long laminated sheet is not wound in a roll shape and is unfolded, and when the laminated sheet is not a long sheet, it is better to store the plural laminated sheets in a further layer. However, when stacking the laminate sheets in this manner, it is preferable that the direction of the plurality of laminate sheets and the position of the peripheral portion are aligned with each other.

非為長條的積層片(換言之單片式積層片)的形狀與大小並無特別的限定。例如較好使用切割裝置,依適於單片半導體晶圓加工的方式,配合半導體晶圓的形狀與大小、切割裝置中供固定支撐片用的夾具的形狀與大小,調整積層片的形狀與大小。The shape and size of the non-long lamination sheet (in other words, monolithic lamination sheet) are not particularly limited. For example, it is preferable to use a dicing device, and adjust the shape and size of the lamination sheet according to the shape and size of the semiconductor wafer and the shape and size of the jig for fixing the support piece in the dicing device according to a method suitable for processing a single semiconductor wafer .

呈積層狀態的上述積層片係可在常溫下或室溫下保存,但以在加熱狀態下保存為佳。藉由依此施行加熱加壓保存,便可獲得黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性均更優異的保護膜形成用複合片。 再者,當對呈積層狀態的上述積層片施行加壓保存時,加熱溫度與保存時間均可設為與上述積層片呈捲筒狀捲取的情況相同。The above-mentioned laminated sheet system in a laminated state can be stored at normal temperature or room temperature, but it is preferably stored under heating. By performing heat and pressure storage in this way, the buildability between the adhesive layer and the protective film forming film, and the protective film or protective film forming film can be obtained with a more excellent visibility of marking through the support sheet. Use composite tablets. Furthermore, when the laminated sheet in the laminated state is subjected to pressure storage, both the heating temperature and the storage time can be set to be the same as when the laminated sheet is wound in a roll shape.

製造方法(S1)中,待積層片保存步驟結束後,藉由解除積層片的加壓、以及視需要的加熱,便可獲得目標之保護膜形成用複合片。In the manufacturing method (S1), after the step of storing the laminated sheet is completed, by releasing the pressure of the laminated sheet and optionally heating, the target composite film for forming a protective film can be obtained.

製造方法(S1)的積層片製作步驟(1)中,基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的積層(貼合)順序並無特別的限定,當預先製作支撐片(預先在基材上積層黏著劑層)、另外預先製作保護膜形成用薄膜、於支撐片上積層保護膜形成用薄膜時,將支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜中之任一者或雙方,於將其積層之前,單獨依照與上述積層片情況相同方法施行加壓保存。藉由將積層前的支撐片單獨施行加壓保存,便可更有效抑制基材與黏著劑層間發生上述未貼合區域。又,藉由單獨將積層前的保護膜形成用薄膜施行加壓保存,便可降低保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜臨黏著劑層之面(第2面)的凹凸度(增加平滑度),俾提升保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜的設計性。In the manufacturing method (S1) of the laminated sheet manufacturing step (1), the order of laminating (laminating) the base material, adhesive layer, and protective film forming film is not particularly limited. Laminating adhesive layer), making a film for forming a protective film in advance, and laminating a film for forming a protective film on a support sheet, either or both of the supporting sheet and the film for forming a protective film before laminating it, Separately, pressurized storage was carried out in the same manner as in the case of the above laminated sheet. By separately storing the supporting sheet before lamination under pressure, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned unbonded area between the base material and the adhesive layer. In addition, by separately storing the film for protective film formation before lamination under pressure, the unevenness (increased smoothness) of the surface (second surface) of the film for protective film formation and the protective film adjacent to the adhesive layer can be reduced, To enhance the design of the protective film forming film and protective film.

即,上述保護膜形成用複合片亦可例如藉由以下製造方法(本說明書中亦稱「製造方法(S2)」)來製造,其包括:在已積層基材與黏著劑層的支撐片之上述黏著劑層上積層保護膜形成用薄膜而製作依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序在其厚度方向積層而構成的積層片之步驟(本說明書中亦稱「積層片製作步驟(2)」);以及將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓的狀態下保存的步驟(保存步驟);其中,在上述積層片製作步驟(2)之前(即,積層上述支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之前),進一步包括:將上述支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜其中任一者或雙方分別在其厚度方向施行加壓並保存的步驟(本說明書中,將保存支撐片的步驟稱「支撐片保存步驟」,將保存保護膜形成用薄膜的步驟稱「保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟」)。That is, the above-mentioned composite film for forming a protective film can also be manufactured by, for example, the following manufacturing method (also referred to as "manufacturing method (S2)" in this specification), which includes: a support sheet on which a base material and an adhesive layer have been laminated The step of laminating a film for forming a protective film on the above-mentioned adhesive layer to produce a laminated sheet formed by laminating the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film in its thickness direction (also referred to as "laminating sheet production" in this specification) Step (2)"); and the step of storing the laminated sheet under pressure in its thickness direction (storing step); wherein, before the laminated sheet manufacturing step (2) (that is, the supporting sheet and the protection are laminated (Before the film for film formation), further including: a step of applying pressure and storing one or both of the above-mentioned support sheet and the film for forming a protective film in the thickness direction (in this specification, the step of storing the support sheet is referred to as The "support sheet storage step" refers to the step of storing the protective film forming thin film as the "protective film forming thin film storing step").

◎製造方法(S2) 上述製造方法(S2)係除了上述積層片製作步驟(1)係施行積層片製作步驟(2),更追加施行上述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟中之任一步驟或雙方之外,與上述製造方法(S1)相同。◎Manufacturing method (S2) The above-mentioned manufacturing method (S2) is in addition to the above-mentioned build-up sheet manufacturing step (1) is to perform the build-up sheet manufacturing step (2), in addition to performing either or both of the above-mentioned support sheet storage step and protective film forming film storage step It is the same as the above-mentioned manufacturing method (S1).

<<積層片製作步驟(2)>> 上述積層片製作步驟(2),如上述,除預先製作支撐片、另外預先製作保護膜形成用薄膜、依在支撐片上積層保護膜形成用薄膜的方式限定各層的積層順之外,與製造方法(S1)的積層片製作步驟(1)相同。<<Layer production step (2)>> The above-mentioned lamination sheet manufacturing step (2), as described above, except for the preparation of a support sheet in advance, the preparation of a thin film for forming a protective film in advance, and the limitation of the lamination order of each layer in the manner of laminating the thin film for forming a protective film on the support sheet, and the manufacturing method The production step (1) of the laminated sheet of (S1) is the same.

<<支撐片保存步驟、保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟>> 上述支撐片保存步驟與保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟係各自的保存標的物並非積層片而是支撐片或保護膜形成用薄膜之外,可依照與製造方法(S1)的積層片保存步驟同樣地進行。 此情況,例如支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜的保存時間,係與積層片的情況同樣,分別可獨立地設為24~720小時(1~30天)、48~480小時(2~20天)及72~240小時(3~10天)中之任一者。<<Supporting sheet storage step, protective film forming film storage step>> The above-mentioned support sheet storage step and the protective film formation film storage step are the respective storage objects other than the laminate sheet but the support sheet or the protective film formation film, which can be carried out in the same manner as in the production method (S1) of the laminate sheet storage step get on. In this case, for example, the storage time of the thin film for forming the support sheet and the protective film is the same as the case of the laminated sheet, and can be independently set to 24 to 720 hours (1 to 30 days) and 48 to 480 hours (2 to 20 days, respectively) ) And 72 to 240 hours (3 to 10 days).

另一方面,上述支撐片保存步驟與保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟係分別如上述變更保存標的物之外,還有變更保存標的物(支撐片或保護膜形成用薄膜)的保存時間,除這些變更事項之外,依照與製造方法(S1)的積層片保存步驟同樣地實施。 此情況,例如支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜的保存時間係可分別各自獨立地設為12~720小時(0.5~30天)、12~480小時(0.5~20天)及12~240小時(0.5~10天)中之任一者。但,此僅為上述保存時間一例而已。On the other hand, the above support sheet storage step and the protective film formation film storage step are the same as described above, in addition to changing the storage target, there is also a change in the storage target object (support sheet or protective film forming film) storage time, in addition to these Except for the change, it is carried out in the same manner as the lamination sheet storage step of the manufacturing method (S1). In this case, for example, the storage time of the support sheet and the protective film forming film can be independently set to 12 to 720 hours (0.5 to 30 days), 12 to 480 hours (0.5 to 20 days), and 12 to 240 hours ( 0.5~10 days). However, this is only an example of the above-mentioned storage time.

本發明一態樣的支撐片之製造方法,包括下列步驟: 準備依序包括基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜且上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係凹凸面的第1積層片;以及 將上述第1積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時。The manufacturing method of the supporting sheet of the present invention includes the following steps: Preparing a first laminated sheet including a base material, an adhesive layer, and a first release film in this order, and the base material has an uneven surface on one surface of the adhesive layer; and The first laminated sheet is stored at 53 to 75°C for 24 to 720 hours.

再者,本發明另一態樣的保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,係包下列步驟: 準備第1積層片與積層薄膜,上述第1積層片依序包括基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜,上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係凹凸面,上述積層薄膜依序包括第3剝離薄膜、保護膜形成用薄膜及第2剝離薄膜; 將上述第1積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時; 除去上述第1剝離薄膜與第2剝離薄膜,使上述黏著劑層的露出面與上述保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面貼合,而製造依序包括上述基材、上述黏著劑層、上述保護膜形成用薄膜及上述第3剝離薄膜的第2積層片;以及 將上述第2積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時。Furthermore, the method for manufacturing a composite film for forming a protective film according to another aspect of the present invention includes the following steps: Prepare a first laminate sheet and a laminate film. The first laminate sheet includes a substrate, an adhesive layer, and a first release film in sequence. The substrate has a concave-convex surface on one surface of the adhesive layer. The laminate film includes a first 3 The peeling film, the film for forming the protective film and the second peeling film; Store the first laminated sheet at 53~75℃ for 24~720 hours; The first peeling film and the second peeling film are removed, the exposed surface of the adhesive layer is bonded to the exposed surface of the protective film forming film, and the manufacturing sequence includes the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the protective film Forming film and the second lamination sheet of the above-mentioned third release film; and The above second laminated sheet is stored at 53 to 75°C for 24 to 720 hours.

再者,本發明另一態樣係就上述保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,其中,使上述黏著劑層的露出面與上述保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面貼合之步驟,係在53~75℃,以0.3~0.8MPa的壓力施行按壓下進行。Furthermore, another aspect of the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing the protective film-forming composite sheet, wherein the step of bonding the exposed surface of the adhesive layer to the exposed surface of the protective film-forming film is at 53 ~75°C, press under pressure of 0.3~0.8MPa.

再者,本發明另一態樣係就上述保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,其中,上述第1積層片、上述積層薄膜及上述第2積層片分別係長條的積層片或積層薄膜;上述第1積層片與上述第2積層片分別在上述保存的步驟中,被捲取呈捲筒狀保存。 [實施例]Furthermore, another aspect of the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing the protective film-forming composite sheet, wherein the first laminate sheet, the laminate film, and the second laminate sheet are each a long laminate sheet or laminate film; The first laminate sheet and the second laminate sheet are respectively wound and stored in a roll shape in the storage step. [Example]

以下,利用具體實施例,針對本發明進行更詳細說明。惟,本發明並不僅侷限於以下所示實施例。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail using specific embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments shown below.

<保護膜形成用組成物之製造原料> 用於保護膜形成用組成物的製造的原料,如下所示。 ‧聚合體成分(A) (A)-1:由丙烯酸甲酯(85質量份)與丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯(15質量份)進行共聚合而形成的丙烯酸系聚合體(重量平均分子量370000、玻璃轉移溫度6℃) ‧熱硬化性成分(B1) (B1)-1:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER828」、環氧當量184~ 194g/eq) (B1)-2:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER1055」、環氧當量800~ 900g/eq) (B1)-3:二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂(DIC公司製「Epicron HP-7200HH」、環氧當量255~260g/eq) ‧熱硬化劑(B2) (B2)-1:二氰二胺(ADEKA公司製「ADK HARDENER EH-3636AS」、熱活性潛在性環氧樹脂硬化劑、(thermally active latent)活性氫量21g/eq) ‧硬化促進劑(C) (C)-1:2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑(四國化成工業公司製「Curezol 2PHZ-PW」) ‧填充劑(D) (D)-1:二氧化矽填料(Admatechs公司製「SC2050MA」、經環氧系化合物施行表面修飾後的二氧化矽填料、平均粒徑0.5μm) ‧偶合劑(E) (E)-1:3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷(NUC公司製「A-1110」) ‧著色劑(I) (I)-1:黑色顏料(大日精化公司製)<Manufacture raw materials of the composition for forming a protective film> The raw materials used for the production of the protective film forming composition are as follows. ‧Polymer composition (A) (A)-1: Acrylic polymer formed by copolymerization of methyl acrylate (85 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (15 parts by mass) (weight average molecular weight 370,000, glass transition temperature 6°C) ‧Thermosetting component (B1) (B1)-1: Bisphenol A type epoxy resin ("jER828" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 184~194g/eq) (B1)-2: Bisphenol A epoxy resin ("jER1055" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 800-900g/eq) (B1)-3: Dicyclopentadiene type epoxy resin ("Epicron HP-7200HH" manufactured by DIC Corporation, epoxy equivalent 255~260g/eq) ‧Heat hardener (B2) (B2)-1: Dicyandiamide ("ADK HARDENER EH-3636AS" manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, thermally active latent epoxy resin hardener, (thermally active latent) active hydrogen content 21g/eq) ‧Hardening accelerator (C) (C)-1: 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylolimidazole ("Curezol 2PHZ-PW" manufactured by Shikoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ‧Filler (D) (D)-1: Silicon dioxide filler ("SC2050MA" manufactured by Admatechs, surface-modified silica filler with epoxy compound, average particle size 0.5 μm) ‧Coupling agent (E) (E)-1: 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane ("A-1110" manufactured by NUC Corporation) ‧Colorant (I) (I)-1: Black pigment (manufactured by Dari Fine Chemicals)

[實施例1] <支撐片之製造> (黏著劑組成物(I-4)之製造) 製造固形份濃度30質量%的非能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物(I-4),其含有丙烯酸系聚合體(100質量份、固形份)與三官能基二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯系交聯劑(三井武田化學公司製「TAKENATE D110N」)(40質量份(固形份)),還含有甲乙酮、甲苯及醋酸乙酯的混合溶劑作為溶劑。上述丙烯酸系聚合體係由丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯(2EHA)(80質量份)及丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯(HEA)(20質量份)進行共聚合而成的重量平均分子量800000的預共聚物。[Example 1] <Manufacture of support sheet> (Manufacture of adhesive composition (I-4)) Manufacture of a non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition (I-4) with a solid content concentration of 30% by mass, which contains an acrylic polymer (100 parts by mass, solid content) and trifunctional xylylene diisocyanate It is a cross-linking agent ("TAKENATE D110N" manufactured by Mitsui Takeda Chemical Co., Ltd.) (40 parts by mass (solid content)) and also contains a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and ethyl acetate as a solvent. The above-mentioned acrylic polymerization system has a weight average molecular weight of 800,000 obtained by copolymerizing 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) (80 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) (20 parts by mass). Copolymer.

(支撐片之製造) 使用聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯製薄膜的單面經利用聚矽氧處理而施行剝離處理過的第1剝離薄膜(Lintec公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm),在其剝離處理面,塗佈上述所獲得黏著劑組成物(I-4),於120℃下施行2分鐘加熱乾燥,而形成非能量線硬化性黏著劑層。此時,依黏著劑層厚度成為4μm方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)。(Manufacture of support sheet) The first peeling film (“SP-PET381031” manufactured by Lintec Corporation, thickness 38 μm) on one side of which a polyethylene terephthalate film was subjected to peeling treatment on one side by polysiloxane treatment, on the peeling treatment surface, The adhesive composition (I-4) obtained above was applied and heated and dried at 120° C. for 2 minutes to form a non-energy ray-curable adhesive layer. At this time, the conditions were set so that the thickness of the adhesive layer became 4 μm, and the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied.

在聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)其中一表面,藉由使金屬輥的凹凸面在加熱狀態下旋轉而施行按壓,藉此製得其中一面為凹凸面、另一面為平滑面(亮澤面)的基材。針對此基材的凹凸面,根據JIS B 0601:2013測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz),結果為5μm。On one surface of a polypropylene film (made by Mitsubishi Resin Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm), the uneven surface of the metal roller is rotated while being heated to press, whereby one of the surfaces is an uneven surface and the other surface is a smooth surface (Glossy surface) base material. For the uneven surface of this substrate, the maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured according to JIS B 0601:2013, and the result was 5 μm.

其次,藉由在上述所獲得黏著劑層的露出面,貼合上述基材的凹凸面,獲得依照基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜的順序在其厚度方向積層的第1積層片。所獲得的第1積層片的寬度(換言之,基材與黏著劑層的寬度)係400mm、長度係250m。Next, by bonding the concave-convex surface of the base material on the exposed surface of the obtained adhesive layer, a first laminated sheet laminated in the thickness direction of the base material, the adhesive layer, and the first release film was obtained. The width of the obtained first laminate sheet (in other words, the width of the base material and the adhesive layer) was 400 mm, and the length was 250 m.

其次,將依上述所獲得全體大小400mm×250m的第1積層片,將其長邊方向設為捲取方向,在捲取張力160N/m、捲取速度50m/min、捲取張力漸縮比90%的條件下,捲繞於外徑88mm的ABS樹脂製芯,而捲取呈捲筒狀。此時,以基材在輥的徑向上朝外側的方式(換言之,使第1剝離薄膜接觸於芯),捲取第1積層片。 其次,將此捲筒狀第1積層片在空氣環境下、60℃溫度條件下,靜置保存7天(168小時)。 依上述獲得支撐片。 針對此支撐片,可馬上施行後述關於基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的評價。又,此支撐片使用於後述的保護膜形成用複合片的製造。Next, take the first laminate with the overall size of 400 mm × 250 m obtained as described above, and set its long-side direction as the winding direction. At the winding tension of 160 N/m, the winding speed of 50 m/min, and the winding tension tapering ratio Under 90% of the conditions, it is wound around an ABS resin core with an outer diameter of 88 mm, and the winding takes the form of a roll. At this time, the first laminate sheet was wound so that the base material faced outward in the radial direction of the roller (in other words, the first release film was brought into contact with the core). Next, this roll-shaped first laminated sheet was stored in an air environment at a temperature of 60°C for 7 days (168 hours). The support sheet was obtained as described above. For this support sheet, the evaluation of the unattached area between the base material and the adhesive layer described later can be immediately performed. In addition, this support sheet is used for the production of a composite sheet for forming a protective film described later.

<保護膜形成用複合片之製造> (保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)之製造) 使聚合體成分(A)-1(150質量份)、熱硬化性成分(B1)-1(60質量份)、(B1)-2(10質量份)、(B1)-3(30質量份)、(B2)-1(2質量份)、硬化促進劑(C)-1(2質量份)、填充劑(D)-1(320質量份)、偶合劑(E)-1(2質量份)及著色劑(I)-1(18質量份),溶解或分散於甲乙酮、甲苯及醋酸乙酯的混合溶劑,在23℃下施行攪拌,而獲得固形份濃度51質量%的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)。另外,此處所示摻合量全部均指「固形份量」。<Manufacture of composite sheet for forming protective film> (Manufacture of the protective film forming composition (III-1)) Polymer component (A)-1 (150 parts by mass), thermosetting component (B1)-1 (60 parts by mass), (B1)-2 (10 parts by mass), (B1)-3 (30 parts by mass) ), (B2)-1 (2 parts by mass), hardening accelerator (C)-1 (2 parts by mass), filler (D)-1 (320 parts by mass), coupling agent (E)-1 (2 parts by mass) Parts) and coloring agent (I)-1 (18 parts by mass), dissolved or dispersed in a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and ethyl acetate, and stirred at 23°C to obtain a thermosetting property with a solid content concentration of 51% by mass Composition for forming a protective film (III-1). In addition, all the blending amounts shown here refer to "solid content".

(保護膜形成用薄膜之製造) 使用聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯製薄膜單面經聚矽氧處理而施行剝離處理過的剝離薄膜(第3剝離薄膜、Lintec公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm),在其剝離處理面使用刀塗機塗佈上述所獲得的保護膜形成用組成物(III-1),於100℃下施行2分鐘乾燥,便製得厚度25μm的熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜。(Manufacture of thin film for forming protective film) Using a polyethylene terephthalate film with one side peeled by polysiloxane treatment and subjected to a peeling treatment (third peeling film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by Lintec, thickness 38 μm), on the peeling treatment surface The composition (III-1) for forming a protective film obtained above was applied using a knife coater, and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to obtain a thermosetting film for forming a protective film with a thickness of 25 μm.

再者,在所獲得的保護膜形成用薄膜未設有第3剝離薄膜之一側的露出面,貼合剝離薄膜(第2剝離薄膜、Lintec公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm)的剝離處理面,便獲得在保護膜形成用薄膜其中一面上設有第2剝離薄膜、在另一面上設有第3剝離薄膜的積層薄膜。所獲得的積層薄膜的寬度(換言之,保護膜形成用薄膜、第2剝離薄膜及第3剝離薄膜的寬度)係400mm。In addition, the obtained protective film forming film was not provided with an exposed surface on one side of the third release film, and a release film (second release film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by Lintec Corporation, thickness 38 μm) was peeled. By treating the surface, a laminated film in which the second release film is provided on one side of the protective film forming film and the third release film is provided on the other side is obtained. The width of the obtained laminated film (in other words, the widths of the protective film forming film, the second release film, and the third release film) was 400 mm.

(保護膜形成用複合片之製造) 準備直徑5cm、截至距表面深度3mm的區域係由硬度50度的耐熱性聚矽氧橡膠構成之1組(2支)輥。 從上述所獲得的支撐片的黏著劑層除去第1剝離薄膜。又,從上述所獲得的積層薄膜除去第2剝離薄膜。 然後,使上述經除去第1剝離薄膜而生成的黏著劑層露出面與上述經除去第2剝離薄膜而生成的保護膜形成用薄膜露出面呈相對向,使這些支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜重疊而形成積層物,同時將此積層物以0.3m/min速度通過溫度設定在60℃的這些輥間之間隙,而以0.5MPa的壓力施行加熱按壓(加熱層壓)。藉此製得依照基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及第3剝離薄膜的順序在其厚度方向上積層而構成之具有與目標保護膜形成用複合片相同積層構造的第2積層片(保存前的保護膜形成用複合片)。 所獲得的上述第2積層片的寬度(換言之,係支撐片寬度)係400mm。(Manufacture of composite sheet for forming protective film) Prepare a set of 2 rollers with a diameter of 5 cm and a depth up to 3 mm from the surface consisting of heat-resistant silicone rubber with a hardness of 50 degrees. The first release film is removed from the adhesive layer of the support sheet obtained above. In addition, the second release film was removed from the laminated film obtained above. Then, the exposed surface of the adhesive layer formed by removing the first release film is opposed to the exposed surface of the film for forming a protective film formed by removing the second release film, and the support sheet and the film for forming a protective film are made Overlay to form a laminate, while passing the laminate at a speed of 0.3 m/min through the gap between these rollers whose temperature is set at 60°C, and applying heat pressing (heat lamination) at a pressure of 0.5 MPa. In this way, a second laminated sheet having the same lamination structure as the target protective film-forming composite sheet is formed by laminating the substrate, the adhesive layer, the protective film forming film, and the third release film in the thickness direction in this order. (Composite sheet for forming a protective film before storage). The width of the obtained second laminate sheet (in other words, the width of the support sheet) was 400 mm.

其次,將依上述所獲得的全體大小400mm×250m的第2積層片,將其長邊方向設為捲取方向,在捲取張力160N/m、捲取速度50m/min、捲取張力的漸縮比90%的條件下,捲繞於ABS樹脂的芯,而捲取呈捲筒狀。此時,依基材在輥的徑向上朝外側的方式(換言之,使第3剝離薄膜接觸於芯),捲取第2積層片。 其次,將此捲筒狀第2積層片在空氣環境下、60℃溫度條件下,靜置保存7天(168小時)。 依上述,獲得具有圖2所示構造的本發明保護膜形成用複合片。Next, the second laminated sheet having the overall size of 400 mm×250 m obtained as described above is set with the longitudinal direction as the winding direction. At the winding tension of 160 N/m, the winding speed of 50 m/min, and the winding tension gradually Under the condition of 90% reduction ratio, it is wound around the core of ABS resin, and the winding takes the form of a roll. At this time, the second laminate sheet is wound up so that the base material faces outward in the radial direction of the roller (in other words, the third release film is brought into contact with the core). Next, the roll-shaped second laminate sheet was stored in an air environment at 60°C for 7 days (168 hours). As described above, the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention having the structure shown in FIG. 2 was obtained.

其次,針對經在此種加熱加壓條件下完成保存後的本發明保護膜形成用複合片,施行以下所示項目的評價。Next, the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention after completion of storage under such heat and pressure conditions was evaluated for the items shown below.

<支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之評價> (基材與黏著劑層間有無未貼合區域、及其層間距離的評價) 從上述所獲得的保護膜形成用複合片的5個地方,切取大小3mm×3mm的試驗片。此5個地方的切取位置係設為在圓形狀保護膜形成用薄膜中,相當於中心處的1個地方,以及靠近周緣部位且相對於此中心處幾乎呈點對稱位置的4個地方。這5個地方的切取位置中,相當於中心處的1個地方、與其餘靠近周緣部位的4個地方之中心間距離係100mm。<Evaluation of composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film> (Evaluation of the presence of unlaminated areas between the substrate and the adhesive layer and the distance between the layers) From 5 places of the obtained composite film for forming a protective film, a test piece having a size of 3 mm×3 mm was cut out. The cut positions of these five places are set to correspond to one place in the center of the thin film for forming a circular protective film, and four places close to the peripheral part and almost point-symmetrical with respect to the center. Among these five places, the cutting distance is equivalent to one place in the center, and the distance between the centers of the other four places close to the periphery is 100 mm.

使用截面試料製作裝置(JEOL公司製「截面拋光機SM-09010」),將間歇式閘門的條件設為「in」10秒、「out」5秒,離子源電壓設為3kV、總拋光時間設為24小時,從上述試驗片形成其截面。新形成的截面係設為每1片試驗片僅有1面。Using a cross-section sample preparation device ("Section Polishing Machine SM-09010" manufactured by JEOL), the conditions of the intermittent gate were set to "in" for 10 seconds and "out" for 5 seconds, the ion source voltage was set to 3 kV, and the total polishing time was set For 24 hours, a cross section was formed from the above test piece. The newly formed cross-section is assumed to have only one surface per test piece.

使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察這5個試驗片新形成的截面,確認在基材與黏著劑層間有無未貼合區域。然後,有未貼合區域時,便測定其數量與層間距離最大值(d1)。 此時的試驗片截面觀察區域,係設為上述截面寬度方向上距中心1mm區域(換言之,以上述截面寬度方向的二個端部中點為中心,寬度方向1mm的區域)。 另外,測定此層間距離時,以與上述試驗片情況相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片形成截面,在此截面測定基材與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)。 然後依照下述基準,針對基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域進行評價。結果如表1所示。Using a scanning electron microscope (SEM), the newly formed cross-sections of these five test pieces were observed to confirm whether there were unbonded areas between the substrate and the adhesive layer. Then, when there is an unlaminated area, the number and the maximum distance between layers (d1) are measured. The cross-sectional observation area of the test piece at this time was defined as an area 1 mm from the center in the width direction of the cross section (in other words, an area of 1 mm in the width direction centered on the midpoints of the two end portions in the width direction of the cross section). In addition, when measuring this interlayer distance, a cross-section was formed in the composite sheet for forming a protective film in the same way as the above test piece, and the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the substrate and the adhesive layer was measured at this cross-section. Then, in accordance with the following criteria, evaluation was performed on the unlaminated area between the substrate and the adhesive layer. The results are shown in Table 1.

(未貼合區域數量之評價) A:未貼合區域數量在5個以下。 B:未貼合區域數量係6~9個。 C:未貼合區域數量達10個以上。(Evaluation of the number of unattached areas) A: The number of unattached areas is less than 5. B: The number of unattached areas is 6-9. C: The number of unattached areas is more than 10.

(層間距離最大值(d1)之評價) A:完全沒有未貼合區域、或其層間距離最大值(d1)未滿0.1μm。 B:雖有未貼合區域,但其層間距離最大值(d1)係0.1~0.5μm。 C:有未貼合區域,其層間距離最大值(d1)大於0.5μm。(Evaluation of the maximum distance (d1) between layers) A: There is no unbonded area at all, or the maximum value (d1) between the layers is less than 0.1 μm. B: Although there is an unlaminated area, the maximum interlayer distance (d1) is 0.1 to 0.5 μm. C: There is an unlaminated area, and the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance is greater than 0.5 μm.

(保護膜之列印檢視性評價) 從上述所獲得的保護膜形成用複合片中除去第3剝離薄膜,將藉此生成的保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面(與黏著劑層側為相反側的面),貼附於8吋半導體晶圓的背面。此時的貼附係使用貼膜機(Lintec公司製「RAD2700」)進行。藉此,製得依照基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及半導體晶圓的順序在其厚度方向上積層而構成的第1積層構造體。(Evaluation of printability of protective film) Remove the third release film from the composite film for forming a protective film obtained above, and attach the exposed surface (the surface opposite to the adhesive layer side) of the film for forming a protective film thus formed to an 8-inch semiconductor The back of the wafer. The attachment at this time was performed using a film laminator ("RAD2700" manufactured by Lintec). In this way, a first layered structure is formed in which the substrate, the adhesive layer, the thin film for forming a protective film, and the semiconductor wafer are stacked in the thickness direction in this order.

其次,使用雷射刻印裝置(EO TECHNICS公司製「CSM300M」),藉由對第1積層構造體中的保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層之一面(第2面),隔著支撐片照射雷射光而施行刻印。此時刻印0.3mm×0.2mm大小的文字。Next, using a laser marking device ("CSM300M" manufactured by EO TECHNICS), by irradiating the laser through the support sheet on one side (second side) of the protective film-forming film in the first build-up structure Marking is performed by shooting light. At this moment, 0.3mm×0.2mm size text is printed.

其次,隔著支撐片目視觀察此保護膜形成用薄膜的刻印(雷射刻印),依照下述基準評價刻印(文字)的檢視性。結果如表1所示。此處評價的保護膜形成用薄膜之刻印檢視性,係視為等同保護膜的刻印檢視性。 A:刻印清晰、可輕易檢視。 B:刻印稍微模糊、無法輕易檢視。 C:刻印不清晰、無法檢視。Next, the marking (laser marking) of the protective film forming film was visually observed through the support sheet, and the visibility of the marking (character) was evaluated according to the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 1. The marking visibility of the protective film forming film evaluated here is regarded as equivalent to the marking visibility of the protective film. A: The marking is clear and easy to inspect. B: The marking is slightly blurred and cannot be easily checked. C: The marking is not clear and cannot be inspected.

其次,從此保護膜形成用薄膜撕開支撐片(基材與黏著劑層)。然後,使用光學顯微鏡(KEYENCE公司製),測定在保護膜形成用薄膜上所形成的刻印(文字)的線條粗細度。其結果,線條粗細度達40μm以上,呈清晰刻印。Next, the support sheet (base material and adhesive layer) is torn off from the protective film forming film. Then, using an optical microscope (manufactured by KEYENCE), the line thickness of the marking (character) formed on the protective film forming film was measured. As a result, the line thickness is over 40 μm, and it is clearly marked.

(基材與黏著劑層間之密接性評價) 根據JIS K 5600-5-6,使用旋切機(rotary cutter),在支撐片的黏著劑層的賦予1mm四方格子狀計100小方格,經壓貼黏貼帶(賽珞膠帶[NICHIBAN公司製、註冊商標])後,依約60°角度、0.5秒~1.0秒撕開黏貼帶,計數100小方格中殘留的小方格數,藉此針對基材與黏著劑層間之密接性施行測試。密接性評價係依照下述判定基準實施。然後依照下述基準,施行基材與黏著劑層之密接性的相關評價。結果如表1所示。 A:殘留小方格數達90以上。 B:殘留小方格數達70以上且未滿90。 C:殘留小方格數未滿70。(Evaluation of the adhesion between the substrate and the adhesive layer) According to JIS K 5600-5-6, using a rotary cutter, a 100 mm square of 1 mm square grid was provided on the adhesive layer of the support sheet, and an adhesive tape (made by Cello tape [NICHIBAN Co., Ltd.] , Registered trademark]), tear the adhesive tape at an angle of about 60°, 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, count the number of small squares remaining in the 100 small squares, and then test the adhesion between the substrate and the adhesive layer . The adhesion evaluation was carried out in accordance with the following criteria. Then, the evaluation of the adhesion between the base material and the adhesive layer was performed in accordance with the following criteria. The results are shown in Table 1. A: The number of remaining small squares is more than 90. B: The number of remaining small squares is more than 70 and less than 90. C: The number of remaining small squares is less than 70.

<支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之製造、以及支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之評價> [實施例2] 除在實施例1的情況,將捲取呈捲筒狀的支撐片,在空氣環境下、60℃溫度條件下,靜置保存3天(72小時)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片。然後,施行基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的相關評價。 然後,除使用此支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。<Manufacture of composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film, and evaluation of composite sheet for forming support sheet and protective film> [Example 2] The same method as in Example 1 was followed except that in Example 1, the support sheet wound in the form of a roll was wound and allowed to stand for 3 days (72 hours) under an air environment at a temperature of 60°C. Manufacturing support sheet. Then, the relevant evaluation of the unlaminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer is performed. Then, except for using this support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[實施例3] 除在實施例1的情況,將捲取呈捲筒狀的支撐片,在空氣環境下、60℃溫度條件下,靜置保存1天(24小時)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片。然後,施行基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的相關評價。 然後,除使用此支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。[Example 3] The same method as in Example 1 was followed except that in Example 1, the support sheet wound in the form of a roll was wound and allowed to stand for 1 day (24 hours) under an air environment at a temperature of 60°C. Manufacturing support sheet. Then, the relevant evaluation of the unlaminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer is performed. Then, except for using this support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例1] 除在實施例1的情況,將捲取呈捲筒狀的支撐片,在空氣環境下、50℃溫度條件下,靜置保存1天(24小時)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片。然後,施行基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的相關評價。 然後,除使用此支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。[Comparative Example 1] The same method as in Example 1 was followed except that in Example 1, the support sheet wound in the form of a roll was wound and allowed to stand for 1 day (24 hours) under an air environment at a temperature of 50°C. Manufacturing support sheet. Then, the relevant evaluation of the unlaminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer is performed. Then, except for using this support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例2] 在實施例1的情況,針對捲取呈捲筒狀的支撐片馬上施行基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的相關評價。 然後,除使用此支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。[Comparative Example 2] In the case of Example 1, the relevant evaluation of the unlaminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer was immediately performed on the winding-up support sheet. Then, except for using this support sheet, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例3] 在實施例1的情況,針對捲取呈捲筒狀的支撐片馬上施行基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的相關評價。又,針對支撐片,用於接下來的保護膜形成用複合片製造。 然後,以與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用薄膜,除未施行加熱按壓(加熱層壓)步驟之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。[Comparative Example 3] In the case of Example 1, the relevant evaluation of the unlaminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer was immediately performed on the winding-up support sheet. In addition, the support sheet is used for the subsequent manufacture of a composite sheet for forming a protective film. Then, a thin film for protective film formation was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the step of heating and pressing (heating lamination) was not performed, and a composite sheet for protective film formation was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1. The results are shown in Table 1.

然後,除使用此種支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法,製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。Then, except using such a support sheet, in the same manner as in Example 1, a composite sheet for forming a protective film was produced and evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.

[表1]

Figure 108109998-A0304-0001
[Table 1]
Figure 108109998-A0304-0001

由上述結果得知,在實施例1~3,基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域數量係5個以下,且其層間距離最大值(d1)在0.5μm以下,保護膜及保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性優異,基材與黏著劑間之良好密接性亦良好。It is known from the above results that in Examples 1 to 3, the number of unlaminated regions between the substrate and the adhesive layer is 5 or less, and the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance is 0.5 μm or less, and a protective film and a protective film are formed The engraving of the support sheet through the film is excellent in visibility, and the good adhesion between the substrate and the adhesive is also good.

相對於此,在比較例1,雖基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域數量在5個以下,但其層間距離最大值(d1)超過0.5μm(0.52μm),而在比較例2~3,基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域達6個以上(8~10),其層間距離最大值(d1)超過0.5μm(0.52~0.9μm),均屬於基材與黏著劑間之密接性不足。又,保護膜與保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性亦差。 (產業上之可利用性)In contrast, in Comparative Example 1, although the number of unlaminated regions between the substrate and the adhesive layer is 5 or less, the maximum interlayer distance (d1) exceeds 0.5 μm (0.52 μm), while in Comparative Example 2~ 3. The unlaminated area between the base material and the adhesive layer is more than 6 (8~10), and the maximum distance between the layers (d1) exceeds 0.5μm (0.52~0.9μm), which is between the base material and the adhesive Insufficient adhesion. Also, the protective film and the film for forming a protective film are inferior in visibility through the support sheet. (Industry availability)

本發明係可利用於半導體裝置之製造。The invention can be used in the manufacture of semiconductor devices.

1A,1B,1C‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 10‧‧‧支撐片 10a‧‧‧支撐片臨保護膜形成用薄膜之一面(第1面) 10b‧‧‧支撐片中與保護膜形成用薄膜側為相反側的面(第2面) 11‧‧‧基材 11a‧‧‧基材臨黏著劑層之一面(第1面、凹凸面) 11b‧‧‧基材中與黏著劑層側為相反側的面(第2面) 12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12a‧‧‧黏著劑層中與基材側為相反側的面(第1面) 12b‧‧‧黏著劑層臨基材之一面(第2面) 13,23‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜 13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜中與黏著劑層側為相反側的面(第1面) 13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層之一面(第2面) 15‧‧‧剝離薄膜 16‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層 16a‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層未接觸到保護膜形成用薄膜之一面 23b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層之一面(第2面) 91,92‧‧‧未貼合區域 d1‧‧‧基材層與黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值 Ta‧‧‧黏著劑層厚度 Ta1‧‧‧黏著劑層厚度最小值 Ta2‧‧‧黏著劑層厚度最大值1A, 1B, 1C‧‧‧‧Composite sheet for forming a protective film 10‧‧‧Support sheet 10a‧‧‧Support sheet near one side of the film for forming a protective film (1st side) 10b‧‧‧Support sheet is formed with a protective film The side opposite to the film side (second side) 11‧‧‧ base material 11a‧‧‧ the surface of the base material adjacent to the adhesive layer (first surface, uneven surface) 11b‧‧‧ base material and the adhesive layer The side opposite to the side (second side) 12‧‧‧‧adhesive layer 12a‧‧‧The opposite side of the adhesive layer from the substrate side (first side) 12b‧‧‧The adhesive layer is close to the substrate One side (second side) 13,23‧‧‧Protective film forming film 13a‧‧‧Protective film forming film side opposite to the adhesive layer side (first side) 13b‧‧‧Protective film forming One side of the adhesive layer with the film (second side) 15‧‧‧ Peeling film 16‧‧‧ Adhesive layer for jig 16a‧‧‧ The adhesive layer for jig does not touch one side of the film for protective film formation 23b‧‧ ‧One side of the adhesive layer for forming the protective film (second side) 91,92 ‧‧‧Not bonded area d1‧‧‧Maximum interlayer distance between the base material layer and the adhesive layer T a ‧‧‧ Layer thickness T a1 ‧‧‧Minimum adhesive layer thickness T a2 ‧‧‧Maximum adhesive layer thickness

圖1係本發明一實施形態的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之示意剖視圖。 圖2係本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片一起顯示之示意剖視圖。 圖3係本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片一起顯示之示意剖視圖。 圖4係圖1所示支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的放大剖視圖。1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a support sheet and a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the composite sheet for forming the support sheet and the protective film shown in FIG. 1.

1A‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 1A‧‧‧Composite sheet for forming protective film

10‧‧‧支撐片 10‧‧‧support sheet

10a‧‧‧支撐片臨保護膜形成用薄膜之一面(第1面) 10a‧‧‧One side of the film for forming the protective film on the protective film (the first side)

10b‧‧‧支撐片中與保護膜形成用薄膜側為相反側之面(第2面) 10b‧‧‧The surface of the support sheet opposite to the side of the protective film forming film (second surface)

11‧‧‧基材 11‧‧‧ Base material

11a‧‧‧基材臨黏著劑層之一面(第1面、凹凸面) 11a‧‧‧One side of the substrate adjacent to the adhesive layer (the first side, uneven surface)

11b‧‧‧基材中與黏著劑層側為相反側的面(第2面) 11b‧‧‧The surface of the substrate opposite to the adhesive layer side (second surface)

12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12‧‧‧Adhesive layer

12a‧‧‧黏著劑層中與基材側為相反側的面(第1面) 12a‧‧‧The surface of the adhesive layer opposite to the base material side (the first surface)

12b‧‧‧黏著劑層臨基材之一面(第2面) 12b‧‧‧Adhesive layer on the side of the substrate (2nd side)

13‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜 13‧‧‧Protective film forming film

13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜中與黏著劑層側為相反側的面(第1面) 13a‧‧‧The surface opposite to the adhesive layer side of the film for forming a protective film (the first surface)

13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層之一面(第2面) 13b‧‧‧ One side of the adhesive layer for forming the protective film (second side)

15‧‧‧剝離薄膜 15‧‧‧ peel film

16‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層 16‧‧‧Adhesive layer for jig

16a‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層未接觸到保護膜形成用薄膜之一面 16a‧‧‧The adhesive layer for the jig does not touch one side of the protective film forming film

Claims (8)

一種支撐片,係包括基材,且在上述基材上設有黏著劑層的支撐片,其中, 上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係呈凹凸面, 從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對該等5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,上述基材與上述黏著劑層間之層間距離最大值(d1)係0.5μm以下。A support sheet includes a substrate, and a support sheet provided with an adhesive layer on the substrate, wherein, The above-mentioned base material has a concave-convex surface by one surface of the above-mentioned adhesive layer, When the test piece was cut out from 5 places of the above-mentioned support sheet and the cross-section of the adhesive layer was observed with respect to these 5 test pieces, the maximum value (d1) of the interlayer distance between the base material and the adhesive layer was 0.5 μm or less. 如申請專利範圍第1項之支撐片,其中,上述黏著劑層係直接接觸於上述基材的凹凸面。For example, in the support sheet of claim 1, the adhesive layer directly contacts the uneven surface of the substrate. 如申請專利範圍第1或2項之支撐片,其中,從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,並針對該等5片試驗片觀察黏著劑層截面時,上述基材與上述黏著劑層未貼合區域的個數,係針對上述試驗片於上述試驗片截面寬度方向中心部1mm區域進行觀察時,各試驗片的個數合計分別在5個以下。For example, the support sheet according to item 1 or 2 of the patent application scope, in which the test piece is cut out from 5 places of the above support sheet, and the cross section of the adhesive layer is observed for the 5 test pieces, the base material and the adhesive layer The number of non-laminated areas is that when the above test pieces are observed in a 1 mm area in the center of the width direction of the cross section of the test pieces, the total number of each test piece is 5 or less. 一種支撐片之製造方法,係申請專利範圍第1至3項中任一項之支撐片的製造方法,包括下列步驟: 準備依序包括基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜且上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面呈凹凸面的第1積層片;以及 將上述第1積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時。A method for manufacturing a support sheet is a method for manufacturing a support sheet according to any one of the items 1 to 3 of the patent application, including the following steps: Preparing a first laminated sheet including a base material, an adhesive layer and a first release film in sequence, and the base material has a concave-convex surface on one surface of the adhesive layer; and The first laminated sheet is stored at 53 to 75°C for 24 to 720 hours. 一種保護膜形成用複合片,係在申請專利範圍第1至3項中任一項之支撐片中的黏著劑層上,設置保護膜形成用薄膜。A composite film for forming a protective film is provided with a film for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer in the supporting sheet according to any one of claims 1 to 3. 一種保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,係申請專利範圍第5項之保護膜形成用複合片的製造方法,包括下列步驟: 準備第1積層片與積層薄膜,該積層薄膜依序包括第3剝離薄膜、保護膜形成用薄膜及第2剝離薄膜,該第1積層片依序包括基材、黏著劑層及第1剝離薄膜,且上述基材靠上述黏著劑層之一面係凹凸面; 將上述第1積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時; 除去上述第1剝離薄膜與第2剝離薄膜,使上述黏著劑層的露出面與上述保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面相貼合,而製造依序包括上述基材、上述黏著劑層、上述保護膜形成用薄膜及上述第3剝離薄膜的第2積層片;以及 將上述第2積層片在53~75℃中保存24~720小時。A method for manufacturing a composite sheet for forming a protective film is a method for manufacturing a composite sheet for forming a protective film, which includes the following steps: Prepare a first laminate sheet and a laminate film, the laminate film including a third release film, a film for forming a protective film, and a second release film in sequence, the first laminate film includes a substrate, an adhesive layer, and a first release film in sequence , And the base material is a concave and convex surface by one surface of the adhesive layer; Store the first laminated sheet at 53~75℃ for 24~720 hours; The first peeling film and the second peeling film are removed, and the exposed surface of the adhesive layer is bonded to the exposed surface of the protective film forming film, and the manufacturing sequence includes the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the protective film Forming film and the second lamination sheet of the above-mentioned third release film; and The above second laminated sheet is stored at 53 to 75°C for 24 to 720 hours. 如申請專利範圍第6項之保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法,其中,使上述黏著劑層的露出面與上述保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面相貼合之步驟,係在53~75℃中,以0.3~0.8MPa的壓力施行按壓狀態下實行。For example, the method for manufacturing a composite film for forming a protective film according to item 6 of the patent application scope, wherein the step of bonding the exposed surface of the adhesive layer to the exposed surface of the protective film forming film is at 53 to 75°C , It is carried out under the pressure state of 0.3~0.8MPa. 如申請專利範圍第6或7項之製造方法,其中,上述第1積層片、上述積層薄膜及上述第2積層片分別均係長條的積層片或積層薄膜;上述第1積層片及上述第2積層片分別在上述保存的步驟中被捲取呈捲筒狀保存。A manufacturing method according to item 6 or 7 of the patent application scope, wherein the first lamination sheet, the lamination film and the second lamination sheet are each a long lamination sheet or a lamination film; the first lamination sheet and the second The laminated sheets are wound and stored in a roll shape in the above-mentioned storing step.
TW108109998A 2018-03-30 2019-03-22 Supporting sheet and method of manufacturing the same, and composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing the same TW202003739A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2018/013597 WO2019187000A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Support sheet and method for producing same, and composite sheet for protective film formation and method for producing same
WOPCT/JP2018/013597 2018-03-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202003739A true TW202003739A (en) 2020-01-16

Family

ID=68058622

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108109998A TW202003739A (en) 2018-03-30 2019-03-22 Supporting sheet and method of manufacturing the same, and composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing the same

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7119070B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102469880B1 (en)
CN (1) CN111527588A (en)
TW (1) TW202003739A (en)
WO (1) WO2019187000A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5432853B2 (en) 1971-10-11 1979-10-17
JP2012015342A (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-19 Dainippon Printing Co Ltd Separator-less type dicing tape
JP6261115B2 (en) * 2013-09-19 2018-01-17 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive sheet
WO2017163971A1 (en) * 2016-03-24 2017-09-28 リンテック株式会社 Supporting sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation
JP6298226B1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-03-20 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for protective film formation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR102469880B1 (en) 2022-11-22
WO2019187000A1 (en) 2019-10-03
KR20200138155A (en) 2020-12-09
JPWO2019187000A1 (en) 2021-04-08
JP7119070B2 (en) 2022-08-16
CN111527588A (en) 2020-08-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI761335B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
WO2017188216A1 (en) Film for forming protective coat and composite sheet for forming protective coat
TWI783131B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI822742B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
TWI731874B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI788543B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TW202003739A (en) Supporting sheet and method of manufacturing the same, and composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing the same
TWI812687B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI801532B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TW202025264A (en) Protective film forming film, composite sheet for forming protective film, method for inspection and method for identification
CN111466014B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
WO2020116288A1 (en) Composite sheet for protective film formation and method for producing semiconductor chip